home *** CD-ROM | disk | FTP | other *** search
Text File | 1998-03-21 | 390.8 KB | 8,986 lines |
-
- AEMAIL.DOC
-
-
- Name of Program: AEMail (Amiga E-Mail)
-
- Version: 1.51 (BETA)
- Release Date: March 21, 1998
-
- Written By: John F. Zacharias
-
- AEMail is copyright (c) 1996-98 by John F. Zacharias, all rights
- reserved. Permission is given to Beta Testers to test and evaluate the
- program in return for feedback on the use of the program and reporting of
- any bugs encountered.
-
- AEMAIL SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE;
- NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE. ALL USE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. NO LIABILITY
- OR RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED.
-
- Installer and Installer project icon (c) Copyright 1995-96 Escom AG. All
- Rights Reserved. Reproduced and distributed under license from Escom AG.
-
- INSTALLER SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE;
- NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE. ALL USE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. NO LIABILITY
- OR RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED.
-
- This documentation is divided into the following Sections and sub-topics:
-
- I. PROGRAM PURPOSE
-
- II. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
-
- REQUIREMENTS
- RESTRICTIONS
- REGISTRATION
-
- III. INSTALLATION
-
- IV. CONFIGURATION
-
- TOOL TYPES
- INTERLACE=YES
- MAIL_DIR=directory-path
- CONFIG=configuration-file
- MAILCAP_DIR=directory-path
- USERID=UserId
- PASSWRD=your_password
- PASSPROTECT=YES (registered users only)
- DOMAIN=Domain_Name
- FROM=your_email_address
- REALNAME=your_real_name
- REPLYTO=reply-email-address
- ORGANIZATION=organization-name
- POP_SERVER=your_POP_host
- SMTP_SERVER=your_SMTP_host
- EDITOR=call_line_for_your_editor
- TCPLOG=name_of_log_file
- DELETEMAIL=YES
- FULLHEADER=YES
- STRIPDUPS=YES
- HDRINREPLY=YES
- STARTNET=call_line_for_your_startnet_script
- STOPNET=call_line_for_your_stopnet_script
- AUTOCONNECT=YES
- FLDRFONT=fontname
- FLDRFONTSZ=fontsize
- AREXXPORT=portname
-
- CONFIGURATION SCREEN
- Identity Page
- TCP/IP Page
- Default Path Page
- Other Parameters Page
-
- V. USING AEMAIL
-
- Starting AEMail
- Starting AEMail from the Shell
- Activating AEMail from the Workbench
- Using AEMail as a "MailTo" Agent
- Editing String Entry Gadgets
- Using the Clipboard with AEMail
- Filtering Messages with AEMail
-
- VI. COMMAND ICON TOOL BAR
-
- Display Folder List
- Display Address Book
- Retrieve Messages
- Display Previous Message
- Display Previous Folder's Message List
- Display Current Folder's Message List
- Display Next Folder's Message List
- Display Next Message
- Compose A Message
- Queue Message For Later Delivery
- Send Message Immediately
- Save Message To File
- Print
- Delete/Undelete Message
- Copy Messages to a New Folder
- Transfer Messages to a New Folder
- Start TCP/IP Network Connection
- Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection
-
- VII. AEMAIL MENUS
-
- Project menu
- Configuration...
- Open...
- Edit...
- Save
- Save As...
- Restore Default
- Send Queued Mail
- Send AREXX/DOS Command...
- Send Last Command
- Iconify AEMail
- About...
- Quit...
-
- Folders menu
- New...
- Edit...
- Delete...
- Set Sort Key...
- Remove DELETED Msgs
-
- Messages menu
- Show
- Deleted Messages
- UnRead Msgs Only
- Compose...
- Reply
- Use Reply-To...
- Use From...
- Forward...
- Edit...
- Select None
- Select All
- Last Selected
- Export...
- Copy...
- Transfer...
- Print
- Delete/Undelete...
- Display Full Hdr
- Incl Hdr in Resp
-
- Retrieve Msgs menu
- From POP Host
- From Local File...
- Excl Dup Msgs
- Delete Host Mail
-
- TCP/IP menu
-
- Start Net
- Stop Net
- TCP Logging File
- Active
- Purge
- Display/Edit...
-
- VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS
-
- Configuration Screen
- Folder List Window
- Message List Window
- Folder Configuration Window
- Filter Selection Window
- Examples of using Message Filtering
- Set Sort Keys Window
- Examples of Setting Sort Keys
- Address Book Window
- Message Display Window
- Attachment Requester
- Compose Message Window
- Add Attachments Requester
-
- IX. AEMAIL AREXX INTERFACE
-
- Introduction
- Synopsis of ARexx Commands
- ARexx Commands
- Error Messages
-
- X. AEMAIL FILES
-
- mailcap
- configuration (s:aemail.cnfg)
- folder.config
- [folder_Name].config
- .addrbook
- .signature
- Messages
- TCP Trace Log File (TCPLOG)
-
- XI. BUG REPORTS & SUGGESTIONS
-
- XII. REFERENCES
-
- XIII. IN CONCLUSION
-
-
- I. PROGRAM PURPOSE
-
- AEMail is a mail client designed to read, process, compose and send e-mail
- from an Amiga computer over the Internet. It provides an easy to use
- graphical interface designed specifically for the Amiga. It connects to
- an Internet server through AmiTCP or any TCP/IP stack compatable with
- AmiTCP. This includes TermiteTCP and Miami. It uses the AmigaDOS editor,
- ed, or any other editor of the user's choosing for developing email
- messages. No other external programs or modules are required. The POP3
- and SMTP protocols are built into the program.
-
- The current version of AEMail supports attachments following the MIME
- (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension) outline in RFC 1341, 1521, 1524
- (Mailcap files), and 1806 as well as UUENCODED attached files. Not all of
- the features of MIME headers are fully supported and exceptions will be
- noted in the documentation.
-
- AEMail can also be used as a "MailTo" agent in WWW browsers, such as
- IBrowse, Voyager and AWeb, which allow the user to specify such an agent
- for composing and sending email.
-
- You can also call AEMail from another program to send a message created by
- that program.
-
-
- II. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS:
-
- REQUIREMENTS
-
- This program can run on any Amiga Operating Systen 2.1 and above.
-
- This program requires a TCP/IP stack compatable with AmiTCP. It has been
- tested with the 4.0 Demo Version of AmiTCP, but will possibly run on
- earlier versions at level 2.0 or greater. It also has been tested under
- TermiteTCP and Miami which use a TCP/IP stack that is compatable with
- AmiTCP.
-
- Other TCP/IP software may or may not be compatable with AmiTCP. If the
- software uses a socket library (bsdsocket.library) with calls that are
- compatable with AmiTCP, it possibly will work.
-
- If you wish to display MIME attachments from within AEMail, you will also
- need a 'Mailcap' file. Specifications for how to set up a mailcap file
- are given under the X. AEMAIL FILES section below. It is possible to
- display attachments with either AmigaDos 2.x or 3.x. Datatypes are not
- required for this display.
-
- A sample mailcap file is also provided in the archive. This sample
- mailcap file can be used without modification on any system running under
- AmigaDos 3.0 or later since it uses multiview as the display agent. If
- you are using a version of AmigaDos before 3.0, you will have to modify
- the mailcap file to specify your own favorite display program for specific
- "Content Type/Subtypes".
-
- RESTRICTIONS
-
- Only one version of AEMail can be running at a time. If you are using
- AEMail as a "mailto" mail agent in a browser, you can not have AEMail
- running when you invoke your browser if you expect to send any email from
- your browser. AEMail will be automatically loaded from the browser when
- you click on a "mailto:" link.
-
- This same restiction applies if you call AEMail from an external program
- to Queue or Send a message created by that program. However, if you use
- and ARexx Script (or command) you can interface with a running copy of
- AEMail.
-
- The "Drag Select" option for message list will only work with AmigaDOS 3.0
- or above.
-
- While AEMail appears to work fine with a standard configured AMIGA, there
- are some possible problems with "system addons" that might not behave
- correctly with AEMail.
-
- One such problem had been with hacks or commodities that moved a window to
- the front when you clicked into it such as the "Click-To-Front" commodity.
- The folder window disappeared. That problem has been corrected. Any
- other hack or commodity that automatically brings the current window to
- front either when you click on it or when you pass the cursor over it,
- should work now. Please let me know if you are still having problems.
-
- Another commodity that causes problems with AEMail is one that
- automatically activates the window under the mouse pointer (AutoPoint).
- Since AEMail uses multiple windows, it controls which window is active at
- any point in time. It is not always the window under the mouse pointer
- since that might not cause AEMail to react properly. As a result, if
- you activate AutoPoint while AEMail is active, you will experience
- flashing windows as AEMail switches control away from the window under the
- mouse pointer.
-
- Other system configurations may also cause problems with AEMail. If you
- encounter one of these, please send me e-mail describing the problem and
- what "add-on" you were using. If it is a public domain program, it would
- be helpful if you included the program as an attached archive to your
- message. (see Section VI, Command Icon Strip: Compose A message).
-
- When you call an editor that requires a stack size larger than the default
- stack size and that program does not create it's own stack, you will have
- to create a script for that editor and set the stack size from that
- script. Increasing the stack size of AEMail will not work because AEMail
- establishes it's own stack size and called programs do not inherit stack
- size from the calling program.
-
- If you are having problems with editors and stack size, you can use the
- supplied script for CED (s:AEMced.scr) and modify it to your
- specifications. One warning, however, if you call a word processor you
- will need to ALWAYS save the file as ASCII and that program must be able
- to accept an already existing ASCII file when it is called.
-
- You can send me e-mail by using the Address Book Nickname AEMAIL. (see
- also Section X, Bug Reports and Suggestions)
-
- REGISTRATION
-
- AEMail is now shareware. Versions prior to 1.15 were "freeware". A
- shareware fee of $30 is requested for AEMail. The shareware fee (US Funds
- only) should be sent to:
-
- John Zacharias
- 10004 Vanguard Drive
- Sacramento, CA 95827
- USA
-
- You must include your Real Name and email address with your remittance. A
- handy form has been provided in the file "registration.form" which you can
- print out and use for this purpose. If you have more than one email
- address with more than one AEMail_Mail directory, please include ALL these
- addresses on the "registration.form".
-
- The "registration.form" has an icon which, if you double click on it, will
- use the "PrintFiles" program in your SYS:Tools directory to print out the
- registration form.
-
- Your registration will be acknowledged by email that must be received by
- AEMail. AEMail version 1.43 does have several features that are not
- implemented for un-registered users and, in addition for un-registered
- users, the message display will be slowed down.
-
- The features in AEMail 1.50 that are not available to un-registered users
- are:
-
- Ability to use multiple signature files.
- Ability to add user defined headers to a message.
- You will not be able to shrink/expand group displays in the Address
- Book displays. The standard Address Book display will have
- expanded group displays and the Compose window address book
- display will have only the group header displayed.
- Enhanced speed on message display.
- Password protection for separate configurations.
- Filtering messages on "Other Message Hdrs".
- Filtering messages on the content of the message body.
- Certain ARexx commands (see Section IX. AEMAIL AREXX INTERFACE or
- consult the AEMail-ARexx.doc)
-
- Future versions of AEMail may also have enhancements that will only be
- available to registered users.
-
- For the un-registered "Freeware" version, permission is given to test and
- evaluate the program in return for feedback on the use of the program and
- reporting of any bugs encountered.
-
- I do ask, however, that, in return for the use of this product, you inform
- me of any suggestions you have and of any bugs that you encounter. You
- can do that by sending e-mail to me using the Nickname AEMAIL which can be
- found in your Address Book when you first load AEMail. (see also Section
- X, Bug Reports and Suggestions)
-
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
- WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- When you send your first message with any new version of AEMail, a special
- "Notification" message will be sent to me at jzachar@calweb.com. Besides
- the normal header information, the body of this message will contain the
- following information (obtained from your configuration file):
-
- Your email address
- Your Real Name
- Your POP3 Server name
- Your SMTP Server name
- Your SMTP Domain Name
- Your editor call
- The version of the Exec (OS) that you are using
- Your Display ID (from the screen mode setting)
- Your Overscan Type (from the screen mode setting)
- Base configuration file name
- Currently active configuration file name
- Mail Directory
-
- This information is provided to help me determine and debug problems with
- AEMail. Future versions may contain more or less information as the need
- arises. The configuration file name is only that - the file name, and
- does not include any configuration information. It is sent primarily to
- see what users are using the alternate configuration file feature of AEMail.
-
- PLEASE BE ADVISED THAT NONE OF THE INFORMATION THAT I INCLUDE IN THIS
- ----
- NOTIFICATION MESSAGE WILL ALLOW ME OR ANY OTHERS TO ACCESS YOUR EMAIL
- ACCOUNT!
-
- Most of the Internet information is public information and can be obtained
- from your service provider.
-
- I WILL KEEP THIS INFORMATION IN STRICT CONFIDENCE. IF YOU DO NOT WANT
- THIS INFORMATION DIVULGED TO ME, DO NOT USE AEMAIL!
- -----------------
-
- I am including this warning because of concerns expressed to me by some
- people.
-
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
- WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This "notification" message will also give me the opportunity to inform
- all users of updates to AEMail by e-mail. When I recieve the notification
- message your email address is placed in a database for informing you of
- updates. If you do not want to be so informed, send me email to that
- effect and your name will be removed from the database.
-
- The notification message will not appear in your PENDING folder although
- you will see it in your SENT folder after the notification message has
- been sent. You will not have an opportunity to change any of the
- information. If you feel some of the information is in error, you can
- correct it by sending me a separate email message.
-
- Please note that a new notification message will be sent when you upgrade
- to a new version of AEMail. This lets me know which version you are
- using. Some of the data in future notification messages may also change
- to help give me feedback on how AEMail is being used and what setup you
- are using.
-
- Also, if you are using multiple configuration files, a separate
- notification message will be sent the first time you send mail with any
- particular configuration. If you re-install AEMail for any reason you may
- have an additional Notification message sent.
-
-
- III. INSTALLATION
-
- The AEMail Install Script uses the Installer program first provided by
- Commodore and later revised by Amiga Technologies. You should use the
- Install_AEMail script to install AEMail. It is not recommended that you
- attempt to install AEMail by hand since some actions are necessary through
- the install script. This is especially true if you are attempting to
- install a registered version with the supplied diskette!
-
- Installer and Installer project icon
- (c) Copyright 1995-96 Escom AG. All Rights Reserved.
- Reproduced and distributed under license from Escom AG.
-
- INSTALLER SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND SUBJECT TO CHANGE;
- NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE. ALL USE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. NO LIABILITY
- OR RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED.
-
- To install AEMail simply double click on the "Install_AEMail icon". The
- install script provides two user levels that the user can choose:
-
- Intermediate (control of configuration parameters only)
- Expert (control of configuration and where files are placed)
-
- The Install script makes an attempt to determine which TCP/IP stack that
- you have installed. This controls which defaults will be taken. The way
- the install scripts knows which TCP/IP stacks are present is as follows
- (you must have installed the particular stack before installing AEMail):
-
- AmiTCP: This is controlled by the presence of the AmiTCP: assign
- statement and the presence of the AmiTCP:bin drawer.
-
- Miami: This is controlled by the presence of the Miami: assign
- statement. When you installed Miami you should have let
- the install create the Miami: assign. This was only
- available under later versions of Maimi.
-
- While the Miami: assign is not an absolute requirement
- if you are using Miami, it is required if you intend
- to use the supplied "startnet.miami" and "stopnet.miami"
- scripts supplied with this archive. The scripts will
- not even be moved to your AEMail drawer if the Miami:
- assign is not present.
-
- TermiteTCP: This is controlled by the presence of the TermiteTCP.prefs
- envronomental variable. Also, if you want to pick up
- some of the other TermiteTCP variables, such as email
- address, you must have run TermiteTCP prior to installing
- AEMail (TermiteTCP does not have to be online, however).
-
- The action that takes place at during the install is slightly different
- depending on whether AmiTCP has been installed or not. The installation
- script determines if AmiTCP is installed by checking for an assignment to
- AmiTCP:. This AmiTCP: assignment was automatically created when you
- installed AmiTCP.
-
- If the AmiTCP: assignment is present, it will determine where the
- installation script will place the AEMail executable. For AmiTCP the
- executable is placed in the AmiTCP:bin drawer. If this drawer is not
- present, the placement of the executable defaults to an "AEMail" drawer
- (created by the script if it does not already exist) on the largest
- partition on your hard drive.
-
- If you wish to control where AEMail will be placed, you will need to
- execute the Install script at the "Expert" user level.
-
- The reason that AEMail is placed in the AmiTCP:bin drawer if the AmiTCP:
- assignment is present, is that the assumption is made that you are using
- AmiTCP. The "startnet" and "stopnet" scripts should be in the same
- directory that contains AEMail if they are to work without modification.
-
- If you select the Intermediate user level, the following actions will be
- taken:
-
- The AEMail executable file will be placed in AmiTCP:bin or, if the
- AmiTCP: assignment is not present, on the largest partition on
- your hard drive.
-
- Note: No special directory will be created if AmiTCP:bin is
- present, otherwise a directory called "AEMail" will be created
- for containing the AEMail executable. When the installation
- script terminates it will tell you where it placed the AEMail
- executable.
-
- The AREXX scripts StartNet.Miami and StopNet.Miami will also
- be moved to this drawer if you have Miami installed on your
- system as determined by a Miami: assignment.
-
- Your AEMail mail directory will normally be a directory called
- AEMail_Mail in AmiTCP: or, if AmiTCP: was not present, in the
- AEMAIL directory. The AEMail mail directory will be assigned to
- AEMAIL:. If an AEMAIL: assignment already exists, that directory
- will be used as the mail directory except that it will be
- renamed to AEMail_Mail if it had been named something else.
- This operation is automatic and makes updating the AEMail program
- easy without disturbing your existing mail files.
-
- The documentation files that you want copied will be copied to a drawer
- called "documentation" in the drawer which contains the AEMail
- executable.
-
- A special ARexx documentation file (which is also part of the
- AEMail.doc and AEMail.guide files, is placed in a drawer called
- "ARexx" in the drawer which contains the AEMail executable. This
- drawer will also contain some sample ARexx scripts.
-
- If you want the AEMail.readme file, it will be copied to the directory
- containing your AEMail executable.
-
- A handy registration form called "registration.form" will be available
- in your main AEMail directory. It has an icon which, if you double
- click on it, will use the "PrintFiles" program in your SYS:Tools
- directory to print out the registration form.
-
- If you are running under AmigaDos 3.0 or greater, the supplied
- mailcap file will be copied to the AEMail_Mail directory.
- No mailcap file will be copied if you are using AmigaDos 2.1.
-
- An AEMAIL: assign statement will automatically be placed in your
- S:User-Startup file.
-
- An "ASSIGN C: SYS:REXXC ADD" will also be added to your s:User-Startup
- file to provide a path to your AREXX commands.
-
- As noted above, the default drawer in which your documentation is placed is
- a drawer called "Documentation" in the drawer containing your AEMail
- executable. This is different from prior versions where the documentation
- files were placed in the same drawer as the AEMail executable. Your old
- documentation files WILL BE deleted by the installation script. If you
- want these retained you will have to re-name them yourself.
-
- If you select either user level you will also be able to provide
- configuration data that will be stored in the Tool Types parameters of the
- AEMAIL icon. Further, if the AEMAIL: assignment existed at the start of
- the installation that assignment will be used. However, if the mail
- directory had been called something else, you will be asked if you want to
- rename it to AEMail_Mail. If you select NO, the directory will not be
- renamed; however, a new AEMail_Mail directory will be created in the same
- parent directory and used for the AEMAIL: assignment.
-
- In addition to what is available for the Intermediate user, the Expert user
- will be able to select what directories will be used and will be able to
- copy the documentation files to a directory of his/her choice. The Expert
- user will also be able to select an alternate location for a pre-existing
- mailcap file and, if running under AmigaDos 2.1, will be able to build
- their own mailcap file.
-
- If you are updating from a previous version of AEMail, it is recommended
- that you install at the Intermediate level. That will insure that all of
- your old assignments and mail files will be available. Also, you should
- not try to configure AEMail with the Install script since you already have
- a configuration file assigned.
-
- The one exception to this is if you are updating from a version of AEMail
- below 1.10. In this case you will HAVE to install at the Expert level in
- order to locate where your old AEMail installation was placed.
-
- Certain configuration parameters must be provided before AEMAIL will run.
- These configuration parameters are provided either by Tool Types in the
- AEMail icon or through a special configuration screen when you first run
- AEMail and saved in an aemail.cnfg file in the S: directory.
-
- The installation script will try to automatically configure certain items
- to default values. These include the switch for deleting mail from your
- POP Server once it has been transferred to your Amiga and the switch for
- stripping duplicate messages. The edit call will default to c:ed and will
- open the editor on the Workbench. Also, if you installed TermiteTCP, the
- installation script will obtain your POP3 UserID and SMTP Domain Name as
- well as your email address from the ttcp-email-address environmental
- variable provided TermiteTCP has been run (not necessarily on-line) before
- the AEMail installation was performed.
-
- The installation script will allow you to provide additional configuration
- parameters as Tool Types in your AEMail icon or to change the default ones.
- However, if you are updating from a prior version you may already have an
- aemail.cnfg file in your S: directory which will override the Tool Types.
- If the S:aemail.cnfg file is present, you will be asked if you want to use
- it or if you want to re-configure using tool types. If you select this
- option your current "s:aemail.cnfg" file will be renamed to
- "s:aemail.cnfg.old" and you can reconfigure through the installation
- script. If you need to restore your old "s:aemail.cnfg" file you can
- rename the "s:aemail.cnfg.old" to "s:aemail.cnfg"
-
- If these parameters are not provided by Tool Types (through the
- installation script) or by an existing configuration file, the
- Configuration screen will be displayed upon the initial startup of AEMail.
- You can not proceed beyond this configuration screen until certain required
- configuration parameters are provided. The absolute minimum configuration
- parameters that must be provided are:
-
- POP3 UserID
- Password
- Your email Address
- SMTP Domain Name
- Edit Call
-
- A POP Server name and a SMTP Server name must also be provided. However,
- if they are missing AND, if the SMTP Domain Name has been specified,
- default values will be assigned to these items. These default values will
- prepend 'POP." to the domain name for the POP server and 'SMTP.' to the
- domain name for the SMTP Server as defaults. Please note: these may NOT
- be correct for your POP and SMTP servers. If they are not, you will have
- to edit the Configuration and make appropriate changes (see Configuration
- Parameters for Identify under Section IV. Configuration in the doc file or
- the section on the Configuration screen in the .guide file).
-
- If you have installed and ran TermiteTCP before you installed AEMail, the
- only configuration parameter you may have to provide is your password. The
- POP3 UserID and the SMTP Domain Name are extracted from the email address
- that you gave TermiteTCP. If these are not the correct values you will
- have to change them in the Identity page of the Configuration screen.
-
- For AmiTCP or Miami users, you will need to provide your POP3 UserID and
- SMTP Domain name as well as your email address.
-
- One of the things that is needed to run AEMail is an editor. By default
- AEMail will use the AmigaDOS editor, ed, which comes with all Amigas.
- However, you can change this through the install to any editor that you
- want provided that you have specified that you want to configure AEMail
- when you do the install.
-
- If you are using AmiTCP, it is recommended that you place AEMail in the
- same directory that contains your AmiTCP StartNet and StopNet scripts
- (usually AmiTCP:bin) although this is not an absolute requirement. If the
- directory containing your StartNet or StopNet scripts is NOT the AmiTCP:bin
- directory or the scripts have names different from "startnet" or "stopnet",
- you will have to add the STARTNET and STOPNET tool types to your AEMail
- icon. You can do that with the installation script at either the
- Intermediate or Expert user levels.
-
- If you are using TermiteTCP, there are no Start Net or Stop Net scripts.
-
- For Miami, special startnet.miami and stopnet.miami scripts have been
- provided with the install of AEMail. If the Miami assign is present, the
- install script assumes the Miami startnet and stopnet scripts should be
- used over the AmiTCP ones.
-
- SPECIAL NOTE FOR MIAMI USERS: In the TCP/IP Settings page on Miami, the
- "Down when Offline" item should be checked and the settings SAVED. If this
- item is not checked, it will take AEMail 80 seconds to determine that Miami
- is offline if Miami is loaded but not online.
-
- The installation script will automatically create a directory for your
- email storage (mail and configuration files) and place TWO ASSIGN
- statements in your S:User-Startup file as follows:
-
- ASSIGN AEMAIL: [your-mail-directory-path]
- ASSIGN C: SYS:REXXC ADD
-
- The second assign statement is used to provide a path to your AREXX
- commands because the only paths visable when you run a program from the
- Workbench are the program directory and C:.
-
- If you are using AmiTCP (as determined by the presence of the AmiTCP:
- assignment), the default directory that is created is AmiTCP:AEMail_Mail;
- otherwise, it will be a directory called AEMail_Mail in the AEMail
- directory that has been created.
-
- If an AEMAIL: assignment already exists, the AEMail_Mail directory will
- not be created nor will the existing mail or Configuration files in the
- directory be disturbed.
-
- If you want to place the AEMail_Mail directory some place else you will
- have to specify the Expert user level when you perform the installation.
-
- WARNING: If you are updating and you change the AEMail_Mail directory you
- will lose all previous folder configuration data including you registration
- information if you are a registered user. You will need to copy this data
- yourself from your old AEMail_Mail directory to the new AEMail_Mail
- directory.
-
- If you are updating AEMail and you are using the same AEMail_Mail
- directory, you will be asked if you want to save your existing
- folder.config file to folder.config.old. If you are updating from a
- version prior to 1.40, you should reply "Yes" to this request. If you are
- re-installing version 1.40 or a later version, reply "No". The format of
- the folder.config file changes once you add filters to any folders. By
- having the folder.config.old file you can revert to an earlier version of
- AEMail by renaming folder.config.old back to folder.config.
-
- The mail directory can start out empty. The AEMail program will generate
- any necessary configuration and support files required. The AEMail_Mail
- directory can be anywhere on any one of your hard drive partitions (or on a
- floppy or other read/writable media); it does not have to be in the AmiTCP:
- directory; but it must be mounted when you execute AEMail.
-
- Special Note on Use of multiple configuration files: The normal AEMail
- configuration file is s:aemail.cnfg. Starting with version 1.13 you will
- be able to assign your configuration file to some other name and location
- (you will need the Expert user level to do this). and this will become
- your base configuration. Also, the installation will ONLY configure this
- base configuration. You will have to use the Configuration screen to
- configure any other configuration files for other users. See Section IV.,
- Configuration, in the doc files for other multiple user considerations.
-
- As stated above, you will need a "mailcap" file if you want to display MIME
- mail attachments. A sample mailcap file is provided on the AEMail program
- disk which uses MultiView to display audio, images, and video content types
- provided that you have the appropriate datatypes loaded into your system.
- This, of course, requires AmigaDos 3.0 or higher. If you are using
- AmigaDos 2.1, the mailcap file needs to be modified to reflect the display
- programs that you want. The installation script at the Expert level will
- help you do this.
-
- If you are running under AmigaDos 3.0 or higher, the installation script
- will automatically move the supplied mailcap file to AEMAIL: unless you
- specified a different location for a pre-existing mailcap file (Expert
- level only).
-
- The mailcap file specifications are given later in this document and in
- the AEMail guide file.
-
- A special mailcap file is provided in the "ARexx" drawer to allow you to
- display html attachments with your browser. If you wish to use this
- feature you will have to copy the mailcap file in the ARexx drawer over the
- mailcap file installed with the Installation script. Read the html.readme
- file in the ARexx drawer for details of this special mailcap file.
-
- AEMail gets the current time zone from either the locale.prefs file that
- is part of AmigaDos or the tz envronmental variable. See "Handling of
- Time Zones" below for further information on this.
-
- When the installation script terminates it will store the directory in
- which it placed AEMail in the Environmental variable AEMail_dir. This
- facilitates updating to future releases of AEMail. The version 1.30 and
- later installation scripts, at all installation levels, will look for this
- Environmental variable to try to determine where to place AEMail.
-
- The AEMail icon that is created when AEMail is installed will have five
- Tool Types entered but commented out. These are:
-
- ;PASSPROTECT=YES
- ;FLDRFONT=
- ;FLDRFONTSZ=
- ;CONFIG=
- ;MAIL_DIR=
-
- These five Tool Types can not be duplicated by the configuration screen.
- Consult the AEMail.guide file for the purpose of each of these Tool Types.
- They can be activated by removing the ";" at the beginning of the tool type
- and adding the appropriate argument information after the "=" sign. You
- can do this with the "Information" menu item in the Workbench Menus (click
- on the AEMail icon first before using the "Information" menu item).
-
- Special Note: You will see in the Workbench documentation that the method
- of commenting out Tool Types is to surround them with parenthesis.
- Placing a semicolon in front of the Tool Type works just as well. If you
- wish to activate then, you only have to remove the semi-colon.
- HANDLING OF TIME ZONES IN AEMAIL
- --------------------------------
-
- AEMail will handle time zones in both full hour and half hour increments.
- AEMail uses either the "tz" environmental variable, a special "aem_tz"
- environomental variable, or the "locale.prefs" file that is part of
- AmigaDos to determine your local time zone. The "locale.prefs" file will
- only allow for full hour time zone offsets. You can use the "tz"
- environmental variable for half hour time zones, but, if this variable is
- used by other programs in your system it is suggested that you use the
- "aem_tz" variable instead.
-
- To set the time zone in the "locale.prefs" file, execute the Locale
- program under your Prefs directory by double clicking on the Locale icon.
- At the bottom right of the Locale Preferences window you will see a world
- map with a white line through it that indicates the time zone that you are
- in. To change this, click on the country you are in. The white line will
- move to that position and the Time Zone heading at the top of the map will
- reflect the time zone offset for your part of the world. Then click on
- the [Save] gadget at the bottom of the window.
-
- Currently AEMail first looks for the environmental variables "aem_tz" or
- "tz". The format for "tz" is dictated by SAS_C and should be aaabbbccc
- where aaa is the abbreviation for local standard time, bbb is the offset
- in hours from GMT (-11 to 12) which is SUBTRACTED from GMT to get the
- local standard time. ccc is the abbreviation for local daylight savings
- time or "summer time" (in the United Kingdom or Europe). If the time zone
- has daylight savings time this should be present even if daylight savings
- time is not currently in effect (contrary to the specification for "Tz"
- for the SAS-C compiler). AEMail automatically determines when DST or
- "Summer Time" is in effect.
-
- AEMail also recognizes an alternate form of "tz" where aaa and ccc can be
- abreviations longer than 3 characters. This is desireable in some
- European countries. AEMail will also recognize time zones in increments
- of one half hour. To specify an half hour time zone, specify it as + or -
- hhmm. As an example: +230 would specify a time zone in which 2 and a
- half hours are SUBTRACTED from GMT.
-
- You can enter the above with the "tz" environmental variable, but since
- this variable might be used with other programs in it's strict sense, an
- alternate environmental variable has been provided called "aem_tz".
-
- If "aem_tz" is present it will take precedence over "tz".
-
- If the "tz" or "aem_tz" environmental variables are not present, the
- system then attempts to get the time zone offset from the "locale.prefs"
- file. Only the time zone offset is present in this file. The
- abbreviations for local standard time and daylight savings time are
- obtained from a table that is by no means complete. Only the time zone
- abbreviations for the United States, Canada, and the United Kingdom are
- contained in this table, so one of the environmental variables is
- preferred.
-
- if neither the "tz" nor "aem_tz" environmental variables nor the
- "locale.prefs" file are present, the system defaults to CST with an offset
- of 6.
-
- NOTE: the standard header in an email message has the time zone offset
- sign reversed from that of the "locale.prefs" and the environmental
- variables. AEMail automatically makes this reversal, so the offset should
- be set to positive for US time zones and negative for European time zones.
- They will appear as negative (for US) and positive (for Europe) in the
- Date: header.
-
- You can set the "tz" or the "aem_tz" environmental variables by using the
- SETENV AmigaDos Command. This must be done from the shell. The syntax to
- use is as follows:
-
- SETENV tz aaabbbccc (for tz) and
- SETENV aem_tz aaaaaaaaabbbbbccccccccc (for aem_tz)
-
- aaa, your local time zone abbreviation must always be present. If you
- don't know your abbreviation (or don't want it in the header), use "xxx".
- If AEMail sees xxx it will assume that no abbreviation is present and it
- will be left off the Date: header
-
- bbb is the time offset in hours from GMT. Plus indicates that you are
- west of GMT and minus indicates that you are east of GMT. Acceptable
- values are -12 to 24. If you want to specify a half our time zone it can
- be entered as hhmm. If AEMail sees a value of 30 or above it assumes that
- a half hour increment is being used. In this case -1200 to 2400 are
- acceptable.
-
- If your time zone observes daylight savings time, ccc is the abbreviation
- to use for daylight savings time. If ccc is not present, no adjustment
- will be made during the times of the year that daylight savings time is
- observed.
-
- The result of the SETENV command is only in effect while your computer is
- on. If you want to make the "tz"or "aem_tz" environmental variables
- always present enter the one of the following AmigaDOS command after the
- SETENV command:
-
- COPY ENV:tz ENVARC:tz (or)
- COPY ENV:aem_tz ENVARC:aem_tz
-
- Using the "tz" or "aem_tz" environmental variables gives you more control
- over which abbreviations will be used for your time zone. However, the
- locale.prefs file may be more useful for those that prefer the "point and
- click" method of doing things. To set the correct time zone for
- locale.prefs, enter the Locale editor in your Prefs drawer. You will see
- a time zone map with which you can move the white strip indicating the
- time zone on the map. Click either to the left or right of the strip to
- move the strip. The correct time zone offset for standard time will be
- shown at the top of the map.
-
- Since the locale.prefs does not have any abbreviations, AEMail makes
- certain assumptions as to what the abbreviation should be. These
- assumptions are as follows:
-
- Time Zone Name Standard DST -----------Time Zone-----------
- Time (in "locale") (in email Date:)
-
- Greenwich Mean Time GMT* BST 0 +0000
-
- Atlantic Time AST ADT 4 -0400
- Eastern Time (US) EST EDT 5 -0500
- Central Time (US) CST CDT 6 -0600
- Mountain Time (US) MST MDT 7 -0700
- Pacific Time (US) PST PDT 8 -0800
- Yukon Time YST YDT 9 -0900
- Hawaiian Time HST --- 10 -1000
-
- International Date Line IDL --- 12 -1200
-
- --- indicates this time zone does not observe DST
-
- *Note: GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) is also known as UTC or Universal Time
- Coordinated.
-
- If you want to use a different abbreviation or control whether DST is used
- or not, you should use the "tz" or "aem_tz" environmental variable.
-
- DST in the United States and Canada begins on the first Sunday in April.
-
- "Summer Time" in the United Kingdom and Europe begins on the last Sunday
- in March.
-
- Both DST and "Summer Time" end on the last Sunday in October.
-
- IV. CONFIGURATION
-
- The configuration of AEMail is provided by parameters presented as Tool
- Types in the AEMail icon or by a Configuration screen that can be called
- up from within AEMail using the "Project/Configuratio/Edit.." menu item.
- All configuration items provided by Tool Types can also be provided by the
- Configuration screen with the exception of the MAIL_DIR=, the CONFIG=, the
- PASSPROTECT=YES, the FLDRFONT=, and the FLDRFONTSZ= Tool Types. These
- five Tool Types have special uses, as explained below, that can not be
- duplicated by the configuration screen.
-
- Certain configuration parameters can ONLY be provided by the Configuration
- screen.
-
- Currently, setting the time zone that you are in is done outside the
- AEMail environment. To set the time zone for AEMail see "HANDLING OF TIME
- ZONES IN AEMAIL" above.
-
- If you are running AEMail from the shell or as a "mailto:" agent, it must
- be either pre-configured (through the S:aemail.cnfg file), or you will
- have to use the configuration screens for the configuration. You can
- specify an alternate configuration file (other than S:aemail.cnfg) by
- using the config= parameter on the AEMail call line.
-
- The first thing AEMail does when it is activated is check to see that
- certain configuration information has been provided either through Tool
- Types or as contained in the AEMail configuration file. The necessary
- items are:
-
- POP3 UserID
- Password
- From Addr (your email address)
- SMTP Domain Name
- Edit Call
-
- If these items have not been provided, the following requester will be
- immediately displayed:
-
- The following Configuration items are empty
-
- [list of empty items]
-
- They are required items!
-
- The Pop Server call and the SMTP call will also be included in this list
- if the SMTP Domain Name was missing.
-
- Also, the Edit Call item, if it is missing, will default to:
-
- C:ed %s
-
- with the editor opening on the Workbench. The only way the Edit Call can
- appear in the list is if the General Parameters page of the Configuration
- screen had been entered and the Edit call field cleared.
-
- If this requester is displayed, you will be given the following choices:
-
- [Configure AEMAIL now] [Cancel AEMAIL]
-
- If you were to click on [Cancel AEMAIL], AEMail will terminate. You can
- not proceed any further until you have entered these items with the
- Configuration screen or by providing them as Tool Types.
-
- Clicking on the [Configure AEMAIL now] will bring up the Configuration
- screen which is described below following the description of the Tool
- Types.
-
- Also, if "Mail Directory" appears in the list of empty items, it means
- that the AEMail: assign is not in the system and the MAIL_DIR Tool Type
- has not been given. There is no way you can provide this information
- through the Configuration screen. You will have to either provide the
- ASSIGN statement or add the MAIL_DIR Tool Type. If you use the standard
- install script, this should never be necessary.
-
- PLEASE NOTE: If you have included the ASSIGN AEMAIL: statement in the
- S:user-startup file and that assignment includes embedded spaces in one of
- the directories in the assignment path, the asignment path MUST be
- surrounded with quotes. The Install script for Version 1.43 automatically
- does this; however, the install scripts for AEMail versions prior to 1.20
- did not do this.
-
- The three Tool Types, MAIL_DIR=, CONFIG=, and PASSPROTECT=YES have special
- uses. CONFIG= is used to specify an alternate configuration file other
- than s:aemail.cnfg that AEMail is to open with. MAIL_DIR= is used to
- specify a mail directory other than the one provided by the AEMAIL:
- assign. It is used to provide an alternate location for the mail files.
- And PASSPROTECT=YES is used to password protect AEMail when you click on
- it's icon. Using this Tool Type will call up a requester as soon as you
- load AEMail which will force you to enter the password that was configured
- for that instance of the configuration file.
-
- If you have two or more users of AEMail on the same system and you want
- each user to have different locations for their mail files, you can
- establish an alternate location for one of the mail directories. To do
- this, you will have to have two different AEMail icons with different
- names if they are in the same directory. You can still have only one
- AEMail executable, however.
-
- One of the icons will have to be a "Project" icon if you only want one
- AEMail executable. To create the project icon execute the "IconEdit"
- program which is in your SYS:TOOLS directory. When "IconEdit" is loaded,
- go to the Open menu and locate the icon for your AEMail executable.
- (don't confuse this with the icon for the AEMail drawer. The AEMail
- executable icon looks like a mailbox). Open this icon. To change the
- icon to a project icon, go to the Type menu in "IconEdit" and select
- Project. Then "Save as" using a different name for this new icon.
-
- You are still not finished, however. You must edit this icon using the
- "Information" menu item on the Workbench menu. First change the Project
- line (it will say JUNK) to AEMail. If you are in a different directory
- then the AEMail executable, you will have to enter the full path name to
- that directory. Then add (or change) the CONFIG= Tool Type to reflect
- where the configuration file is for that particular user and add (or
- change) the MAIL_DIR= Tool Type to give the full path name of the mail
- directory for that user. Be sure to include the ending '/' after the
- directory name.
-
- If you want password protection (only available to registered AEMail
- users) you should also add the Tool Type PASSPROTECT=YES. Do this for
- each icon that you want to password protect.
-
- Please Note: The Project icon will also inherit the Tool Types from the
- main executable icon; however, if there is an identical Tool Type, the
- Project icon's Tool Type will take precedence.
-
- As an example, lets say you have two users named John and Jan. John is
- the primary user of AEMail. You install AEMail (using any mode) in a
- directory called HD1:AEMail and the default AEMAIL: assign is set to:
-
- ASSIGN AEMAIL: HD1:AEMail/AEMail_Mail
-
- If you wanted your configuration file to be John_aemail.cnfg in the AEMail
- directory, you could add the following Tool Type to the AEMail icon in
- HD1:AEMail (this can be done with the Install script as the expert mode or
- through the Information menu):
-
- CONFIG=HD1:AEMail/John_aemail.cnfg
-
- You could then create another directory in HD1:AEMail called Jan_mail.
- This is where Jan's mail will go. Execute "IconEdit" and create a project
- icon that could be called "Jan's AEMail". Now select the icon that you
- just created and the Information item on the Workbench menus. Change
- Jan's CONFIG= Tool Type to:
-
- CONFIG=HD1:AEMail/Jan_aemail.cnfg
-
- and add the MAIL_DIR= Tool Type as follows:
-
- MAIL_DIR=HD1:AEMail/Jan_Mail/
-
- Then, when John wants to use his copy of AEMail and his files, he double
- clicks on the main AEMail icon, and when Jan wants to use her copy she
- double clicks on the one called "Jan's AEMail". The one restriction is
- that you cannot have both copies of AEMail running at the same time. Each
- set will be set up with different configuration files so that information
- in these files can be different.
-
- If you are a registered AEMail user you can also add the PASSPROTECT=YES
- tool type to either of your icons. Please note, however, if you place the
- PASSPROTECT=YES Tool Type on the main AEMail executable icon (John's
- AEMAIL), the project icon (Jan's AEMail) will act as if PASSPROTECT=YES
- was placed on that icon even if it wasn't. However, you can place
- PASSPROTECT=YES on Jan's AEMail icon without placing it on the main AEMAIL
- icon and the main AEMail will not be password protected.
-
- You can also place the configuration files and mail drawers in different
- main drawers. If this is done you will have to remember to put the FULL
- PATH NAME to the AEMail executable in the project icon.
-
- Currently, the creation of the project icon and the modifications
- mentioned above has to be done by hand. In a future version of AEMail,
- the installation script will be modified to do this automatically.
-
- You can configure both instances of AEMail through either the Tool Types
- in the appropriate icon or with the configuration screen when you execute
- that particular instance of AEMail.
- TOOL TYPES
-
- Tool Types have been provided to initially provide certain Configuration
- information when AEMail is first activated without the need to build the
- Configuration information through the Configuration screens.
-
- To modify or delete any specific Tool Type, select the AEMail icon and
- then select the "Information" item from the Workbench menu. You will have
- to select the appropiate Tool Type and modify it when it appears in the
- string gadget below the Tool Type list.
-
- The current Tool Types utilized by the program are:
-
- INTERLACE=YES
-
- Opens the AEMail Public Screen (AEMAIL-1) in hires, interlace mode. If
- this tool type is omitted, the screen will be opened as a hires,
- non-interlaced screen.
-
- You can actually have more control over the Screen Mode you desire by
- selecting the "Set Screen Mode" button in the AEMail Configuration:
- General Parameters configuration display. Selecting a Screen Mode from
- the Configuration display precludes the use of this Tool Type.
-
-
- MAIL_DIR=directory-path
-
- If you do not place the AEMAIL ASSIGN statement in your Startup-Sequence,
- you can use this Tool Type to assign your mail directory. This can also
- be used to provide an alternate location to the AEMAIL Assign statement
- when you have more than one instance of AEMail in your system. This
- parameter CAN NOT be provided with the Configuration screen. (DEFAULTS TO
- AEMAIL: This assumes that the AEMAIL ASSIGN is present). If you are
- using a different directory, be sure and include the ending '/' at the end
- of the directory path.
-
-
- CONFIG=configuration-file
-
- If you do not care to use the standard s:aemail.cnfg file for your
- configuration data, but want a file named something else or in a different
- location, you can use this tool type. When AEMail opens it will look here
- for the configuration file. YOU MUST PRECEDE THE FILE NAME WITH THE FULL
- PATH NAME. This parameter CAN NOT be provided with the Configuration
- screen, although the initial file can be created, saved, and edited from
- the "Project/Configuration" menu. (DEFAULTS TO s:aemail.cnfg)
-
-
- MAILCAP_DIR=directory-path
-
- Your mailcap file can reside in any directory you want. Use this Tool
- Type to assign the mailcap directory path. If this parameter is missing,
- the MAIL_DIR path will be used as the mailcap directory path.
-
- The mailcap file must be called "mailcap". Since the mailcap file follows
- a standard format dictated by the internet, you can use the same mailcap
- file used by another process. That is the purpose of this Tool Type.
-
- This parameter can also be provided with the Configuration Screen
- (DEFAULTS TO AEMAIL:).
-
-
- USERID=UserId
-
- Enter your POP3 UserId for signing onto your POP Server on your Internet
- provider (ISP). This may be the same as the one initially used to sign
- into your ISP. It is also very possibly (but not always) the part of your
- email address that precedes the @ sign. Check with your ISP for what
- should be used.
-
- Example: my UserId is "jzachar" so I would enter
-
- USERID=jzachar
-
- for this Tool Type. THIS IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided
- with the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- PASSWRD=your_password
-
- Enter the password required for signing onto your POP3 server. This may
- or not be the same as that used to sign onto your Internet provider. THIS
- IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided with the Configuration
- Screen.
-
- SPECIAL NOTE: if the password is provided by a Tool Type it can be read
- by anyone that performs an "Information" on the AEMail icon. If you
- provide the password through the Configuration screen, it can not be seen.
-
-
- PASSPROTECT=YES (registered users only)
-
- Use this Tool Type if you want to password protect your copy of AEMail.
- This will call up a special password window when you first load AEMail
- which will require you to enter your password before you procede. You
- will be given three chances to enter the correct password. If the
- password fails validation after the third try, AEMail will terminate.
- This Tool Type is ignored for unregistered users.
-
- The Password that is used is the one required for signing onto your POP3
- server (see above).
-
- DOMAIN=Domain_Name
-
- Enter the Domain name used by your Internet provider's SMTP server. It
- very possibly is the same as the Domain part of your email address (the
- part following the @ sign)
-
- Example: my Internet provider's domain name is "calweb.com" so I would
- enter
-
- DOMAIN=calweb.com
-
- for this Tool Type. THIS IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided
- with the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- FROM=your_email_address
-
- Enter your FULL email address (i.e. user@domain). This is email address
- that you are known by on the Internet.
-
- Example: my email address is "jzachar@calweb.com" so I would enter
-
- FROM=jzachar@calweb.com
-
- for this tool type. THIS IS A REQUIRED PARAMETER, but it can be provided
- with the Configuration Screen. If it is missing it defaults to
- UserID@Domain. This default action may NOT be correct for your situation,
- so be sure to change it if required.
-
-
- REALNAME=your_real_name
-
- Enter your full name. Example:
-
- REALNAME=John Zacharias
-
- This is an OPTIONAL parameter, but if it is omitted your full name will
- NOT be provided in the FROM: address of any messages you send unless you
- add it yourself when you compose a message. This parameter can also be
- provided with the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- REPLYTO=reply-email-address
-
- This is the email address that you want all replies directed to. This may
- be the same as your FROM email address or it can be a different address if
- you want replies sent somewhere else. This is an OPTIONAL parameter and
- can also be provided with the Configuration screen.
-
- The standard REPLY-TO address provided here can also be modified each time
- you compose a message to send.
-
-
- ORGANIZATION=organization-name
-
- This parameter is OPTIONAL and, if present, will provide an Organization:
- header for any message that you compose and send. This parameter can also
- be provided with the Configuration screen.
-
-
- POP_SERVER=your_POP_host
-
- Enter the name of your POP host. This sometimes is "pop." or "mail."
- prepended to your Domain name. As an example, mine is "pop.calweb.com" so
- I would enter
-
- POP_SERVER=pop.calweb.com
-
- If this parameter is omitted, "pop.[domain]" will be generated as your
- POP_SERVER name provided a domain name has been specified. If your's uses
- a differnt name you should use this Tool Type or change it with the
- Configuration screen.
-
- This parameter can also be provided by the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- SMTP_SERVER=your_SMTP_host
-
- Enter the name of your SMTP host. This sometimes is "smtp."
- or "mail." prepended to your Domain name. As an example,
- mine is "smtp.calweb.com" so I would enter
-
- SMTP_SERVER=smtp.calweb.com
-
- If this parameter is omitted, "smtp.[domain]" will be generated as your
- SMTP_SERVER name provided a domain name has been specified. If your's
- uses a differnt name you should use this Tool Type or change it with the
- Configuration screen.
-
- This parameter can also be provided by the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- EDITOR=call_line_for_your_editor
-
- Enter the full call parameter required to activate your editor from the
- shell. Use "%s" where you would place the file name.
-
- You are no longer restricted to an editor call that does not remain in
- control when you call it as you were with previous versions of AEMail. In
- other words, a direct call to CygnusEd (CED) is acceptable.
-
- If your editor opens on the workbench screen rather than a screen of its
- own, you should prepend "WB;" in front of your editor call. As an
- example, the standard AmigaDos ED program always opens on the workbench
- screen. An example edit call for the Amiga ED would be as follows:
-
- EDITOR=WB;c:ed %s WINDOW raw:0/0/640/400/AEMailCompose
-
- The window statement in the above call is used to create a full screen
- window with an interlaced display.
-
- If you are not using an interlaced display you can remove the WINDOW
- parameter or change it to raw:0/0/640/200/AEMailCompose. You can, of
- course, make other changes to the window parameters if you desire.
-
- If you are using the Amiga ED you should probably also remove or rename
- the ED-Startup file in the S: directory so that you will have a full set
- of ED menus.
-
- If this Tool Type is missing, the following call is the default editor
- call:
-
- EDITOR=WB;c:ed %s
-
- This defaults to using the Amiga Ed program for your editor.
-
- The specification for your editor call can also be provided by the
- Configuration Screen. A convenient check mark item is provided in the
- Configuration Screen to open the editor on the Workbench screen.
-
-
- TCPLOG=name_of_log_file
-
- Enter the full path, including the file name, of your TCP logging file.
- If this parameter is omitted, it defaults to "tcplog" in the directory
- AEMail is loaded from.
-
- This parameter does not start TCP logging, it only establishes the name of
- the TCPLOG file. Logging can be started or stopped at any time by a menu
- item (see Section VII. AEMAIL MENUS - TCP Logging File under the TCP/IP
- menu). The Logging file can be active when AEMail is started through a
- parameter in a Configuration Screen item.
-
- When TCP logging is active, all sends and receives over the TCP/IP
- connection are recorded to this file. Each time an AEMail session is
- started and logging is active, data is appended to this file. As a result
- this file can become quite large. IT IS THE USER'S RESPONSIBILITY TO
- PERIODICALLY PURGE (DELETE) THIS FILE. A menu item is provided to perform
- this purge and another item to display the log file with your editor from
- within AEMail.
-
- NOTE: When there is a need to report a problem, especially with your
- TCP/IP connection, the TCP Logging file should be set active and a copy of
- the resultant file provided with any feedback on the program activity (see
- Section XI, Bug Reports & Suggestions). The file can be sent as an
- attachment to any message that you send to AEMail. You probably should
- compress the file with LHA before attaching it as an "Applicatio/Octet
- Stream" content type with "encoded binary" encoding.
-
- I have discovered that this file comes in handy when analysing problems
- with your Internet provider since it time stamps all entries to the
- nearest second.
-
- This parameter can also be provided by the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- DELETEMAIL=YES
-
- This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Delete Host Mail" menu item
- under the RETRIEVE MSGS menu. If this Tool Type is entered, the "Delete
- Host Mail" menu item will be initially checked. See the "Delete Host
- Mail" item under section VII. AEMAIL MENUS below.
-
- This parameter can also be set by the Configuration Screen or the
- DELETEMAIL flag can be set with a menu item and its state can be saved in
- the configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
- item.
-
-
- FULLHEADER=YES
-
- This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Display Full Hdr" menu item
- under the MESSAGES menu. If this Tool Type is entered, the "Display Full
- Hdr" menu item will be initially checked. See the "Display Full Hdr" item
- under section VII. AEMAIL MENUS below.
-
- This parameter can also be set by the Configuration Screen or the
- FULLHEADER flag can be set with a menu item and its state can be saved in
- the configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
- item.
-
-
- STRIPDUPS=YES
-
- This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Excl Dup Msgs" menu item
- under the RETRIEVE MSGS menu. If this Tool Type is entered, the "Excl Dup
- Msgs" menu item will be initially checked. See the "Excl Dup Msgs" item
- under section VII. AEMAIL MENUS below.
-
- This parameter can also be set by the Configuration Screen or the
- STRIPDUPS flag can be set with a menu item and its state can be saved in
- the configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
- item.
-
-
- HDRINREPLY=YES
-
- This Tool Type sets the initial value of the "Incl Hdr in Resp" menu item
- under the MESSAGES menu. If this Tool Type is entered, the "Incl Hdr in
- Resp" menu item will be initially checked. See the "Incl Hdr in Resp"
- item under section VII. AEMAIL MENUS below.
-
- This parameter can also be set by the Configuration Screen or the
- HDRINREPLY flag can be set with a menu item and its state can be saved in
- the configuration file by selecting the "PROJECT/CONFIGURATION/SAVE" menu
- item.
-
-
- STARTNET=call_line_for_your_startnet_script
-
- This Tool Type is used to specify the call line for your script that
- starts up your TCP/IP stack. If you are using AmiTCP, this is normally
- the file "startnet" in the AMITCP:bin directory. If you are using Miami,
- an AREXX script has been provided with the AEMail archive called
- "startnet.miami" and it is located in the AEMail program directory.
-
- A full path name to that script must be entered. If the script is an
- AREXX script it should be preceded with "rx " (a space is between the rx
- and the script name). The standard AmiTCP startnet script is NOT an AREXX
- script even though it uses AREXX commands. It is an AmigaDOS script. The
- Miami script, on the other hand, is an AREXX script.
-
- If you do not use the STARTNET Tool Type, AEMail assumes that you do not
- have a script. If you activate the "Start Net" item in the TCP/IP menu
- and you don't have a startnet script, AEMail's action is to iconify and
- allow you to manually start your TCP/IP stack. Connect using the method
- prescribed by your TCP/IP stack. When you un-iconify AEMail, AEMail will
- immediately check to see if any mail is present on your POP server.
-
- If you are using a TCP/IP stack that can't use a script (such as
- TermiteTCP) or you have no script to make connection to your Internet
- provider, then this Tool Type should not be used. Then if you select the
- StartNet menu item, the system will automatically iconify AEMail and
- present the Workbench screen.
-
- Since AmiTCP Demo Version 4.0 puts up a requester on the workbench screen
- that must be responded to, AEMail will automatically switch to the
- Workbench screen before calling this script. Although the Miami script
- does not require manual intervention, the default action is to also switch
- to the Workbench screen since this allows you to see the action of the
- dialer. When the connection has been made using Miami, the screen will
- automatically switch back to the AEMail screen.
-
- The Start Net script can also be set by the TCP/IP page of the
- Configuration Screen. The Configuration screen will also allow you to set
- whether or not the system switches to the Workbench screen when the Start
- Net script is executed.
-
- Note: Check your startnet script to be sure that full path names are
- specified. If you are using the standard AmiTCP startnet script, that
- script may not be executed from the Amitcp:bin directory (unless AEMail is
- executed from there). Therefor, you should verify that Amitcp:bin/ is
- prepended to all calls to functions within the AmiTCP/bin directory within
- the script. Pay particular attention to the "online" call - it should be
- AmiTCP:bin/online. You will also have to move the AREXX commands (such as
- WaitForPort and RX) to the C: directory. The installation script will
- automatically do this for you.
-
-
- STOPNET=call_line_for_your_stopnet_script
-
- This Tool Type is used to specify the call line for your script that
- terminates your TCP/IP connection. If you are using AmiTCP, this is
- normally the file "stopnet" in the AMITCP:bin directory. If you are using
- Miami, an AREXX script has been provided with the AEMail archive called
- "stopnet.miami" and it is located in the AEMail program directory.
-
- A full path name to that script must be entered. If the script is an
- AREXX script it should be preceded with "rx " (a space between the rx and
- the script name). The standard AmiTCP startnet script is NOT an AREXX
- script even though it uses AREXX commands. It is an AmigaDOS script. The
- Miami script, on the other hand, is an AREXX script.
-
- If you do not use the STOPNET Tool Type, AEMail assumes that you you do
- not have a script. If you activate the "Stop Net" item in the TCP/IP menu
- and you don't have a stopnet script, AEMail's action is to iconify and
- allow you to manually stop your TCP/IP stack. You can then disconnect
- using the method prescribed by your TCP/IP stack. When you un-iconify
- AEMail, AEMail will test to see if you are, in fact, disconnected.
-
- If you are using a TCP/IP stack that can't use a script (such as
- TermiteTCP) or you have no script to terminate your connection to your
- Internet provider, then this Tool Type should not be used. Then if you
- select the Stop Net menu item, the system will automatically iconify
- AEMail and present the Workbench screen.
-
- The Stop Net script can also be set by the TCP/IP page of the
- Configuration Screen. The Configuration screen will also allow you to set
- whether or not the system switches to the Workbench screen when the Stop
- Net script is executed. Since terminating your connection with a script
- usually does not require any visual interaction, the default action is to
- NOT switch to the Workbench screen.
-
- Note: Check your stopnet script to be sure that full path names are
- specified. If you are using the standard AmiTCP stopnet script, that
- script may not be executed from the Amitcp:bin directory (unless AEMail is
- executed from there). Therefor, you should verify that Amitcp:bin/ is
- prepended to all calls to functions within the AmiCCP:bin directory within
- the script. Pay particular attention to the "offline" call - it should be
- AmiTCP:bin/offline. You will also have to move the AREXX commands (such
- as WaitForPort and RX) to the C: directory. The installation script will
- automatically do this for you.
-
-
- AUTOCONNECT=YES
-
- When AEMail is first activated it attempts to determine if you are
- connected to your Internet provider. If you are not and this Tool Type is
- present, AEMail will automatically run your StartNet script.
-
- Before activating this Tool Type, you should check to see if AEMail can
- activate your TCP/IP stack properly using the StartNet menu item. If
- there are any problems with your StartNet activation they will show up at
- this time rather than constantly every time you try to activate AEMail.
-
- WARNING: You should not use this Tool Type if a StartNet script is not
- present for your TCP/IP stack. You should activate your TCP/IP stack
- manually before you start AEMail.
-
-
- This parameter can also be set by the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- FLDRFONT=fontname
-
- This allows the user to specify their own font for the folder strip.
- Since the size of the folders in the folder strip is constrained by the
- size of the font that you use, you can specify a different font and font
- size (see FLDRFONTSZ= below) to reduce the size of the folder strip. If
- not specified the folder font will default to the standard Topaz 8 font.
- When you enter the font name it is entered WITHOUT the .font suffix and it
- must be found in your FONTS: directory.
-
- If you use FLDRFONT= without FLDRFONTSZ=, the resulting font will be the
- one you specify at the 8 size. If no such size exists in your FONTS:
- directory, it will be computed. This can sometimes be unsatisfactory.
-
- Currently this parameter can only be provided by a Tool Type. A future
- version will allow you to specify the font through a special configuration
- page.
-
-
- FLDRFONTSZ=fontsize
-
- This Tool Type is used in conjuction with the FLDRFONT= Tool Type
- described above. These two Tool Types allow the user to specify their own
- font and font size for the folder strip. Since the size of the folders in
- the folder strip is constrained by the size of the font that you use, you
- can specify a different font and font size to reduce the size of the
- folder strip. If not specified the folder font will default to the
- standard Topaz 8 font.
-
- If you use FLDRFONTSZ= without FLDRFONT=, the resulting font will be Topaz
- with a computed font size corresponding to this parameter
-
- Currently this parameter can only be provided by a Tool Type. A future
- version will allow you to specify the font through a special configuration
- page.
-
- AREXXPORT=portname
-
- This Tool Type will allow you to change the default ARexx Port Name. By
- default the ARexx Port Name is "AEMAIL1". A "1" will be appended to
- whatever port name you specify unless that port is already active in your
- system. In this event a number next in sequence will be appended to the
- port name.
-
- The ARexx Port Name will be shown in the About message obtained with the
- "About" item under the Project Menu.
-
- CONFIGURATION SCREEN
-
- The Configuration screen is displayed on the Workbench when you click on
- the [Configure AEMAIL now] button or when you select the
- "Project/Configuration/Edit" menu item. The configuration screen is
- divided into four pages with the page name shown with a button at the top
- of the page area. When you click on any one button that button will
- become highlighted and the appropriate page will be displayed.
-
- The four pages are:
-
- IDENTITY
- TCP/IP
- PATHS
- GENERAL
-
- At the bottom of the Configuration screen is a row of buttons as follows:
-
-
- [USE] [SAVE] [SAVE AS] [CANCEL]
-
-
- Clicking on any one of these buttons will perform the requested action,
- regardless of which page you are on, and return you to the main AEMail
- screen.
-
- If you want the configuration information to apply only to this AEMail
- session select [USE]. If you want to make the configuration permanent,
- select [SAVE]. This will cause a new configuration file to be written and
- will also signal that the configuration file is to take precedence over
- the Tool Types the next time AEMail is loaded.
-
- Normally the configuration file is either s:aemail.cnfg or the file
- specified in the CONFIG= tool type. However, if you opened another
- configuration file with the "Project/Configuration/Open..." menu item,
- that configuration file will be the current active one.
-
- The [SAVE AS] button does the same as [SAVE] except that a file requester
- will be displayed that will allow you to rename and place the
- configuration file anywhere you wish. WARNING: when you use the [SAVE
- AS] button, AEMail assumes that that file is now your active configuration
- file and any saves occuring after that will be to that file. To return to
- the base configuration (either s:aemail.cnfg or the CONFIG= file), use the
- "Project/Configuration /Reset" menu item.
-
- [CANCEL] will abort the operation without making any changes to the
- configuration information.
-
- The [USE], [SAVE], [SAVE AS] or [CANCEL] buttons are active no matter
- which configuration page is currently active. When the Configuration
- screen is first activated, the Identity page will be active.
-
- Before exiting from the Configuration Screen with [USE], [SAVE], or [SAVE
- AS] the required configuration parameters must be present. If not, the
- following requester will be displayed:
-
- The following Configuration items are empty
-
- [list of empty items]
-
- They are required items!
-
- This is the same requester that is displayed when AEMail is started
- without these parameters being provided. Your choices with this requester
- are:
-
- [Reenter Configuration Data] [Cancel Configuration Request]
-
- Clicking on the [Cancel Configuraion Request] will act the same as if you
- clicked on [CANCEL] in the main configuration screen. In this event your
- "old" configuration data will still be active and if you did not have the
- required parameters in the first place, you will not be able to do
- anything but enter the data or exit from AEMail.
-
- The one exception to the "old" configuration remaining the same is with
- the .headers file. This is always updated no matter which button is
- pressed.
-
-
- Identity Page
- -------------
-
- The Identity page appears as follows:
-
- =========================================================================
- AEMail Configuration Screen
- -------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- [ IDENTITY ]____________________________________________________________
- | |
- | POP3 UserID: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT] [CHANGE PASSWORD]|
- | |
- |From (email) Address: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | Reply To Address: [ ][CLR]{DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | Real Name: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | Organization: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | POP Server: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | SMTP Server: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | SMTP Domain Name: [ ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- |_______________________________________________________________________|
-
- [USE] [SAVE] [SAVE AS] [CANCEL]
-
-
- =========================================================================
-
- When this page is first called up, values from the Tool Types or the
- current configuration file (which ever takes precedence) will be displayed
- in each of the string gadgets.
-
- Appropriate information can be entered into each of the string gadgets. Up
- to 99 characters can be entered in each of the string gadgets.
-
- The buttons to the side of each string gadget perform the following
- actions:
-
- [CLR] will cause the string gadget to be cleared.
-
- [DEFAULT] will cause default information to be loaded into the
- string gadgets as follows:
-
- POP3 UserID: information from the USERID= Tool Type.
- From Address: information from the FROM= Tool Type.
- Reply To Address: information from the REPLYTO=
- Tool Type or, if missing, the From Address.
- Real Name: information from the REALNAME= Tool Type.
- Organization: information from the ORGANIZATION= Tool
- Type.
- SMTP Domain Name: Information from the DOMAIN= Tool Type.
- POP Server: information from the POP_SERVER= Tool Type
- if present; otherwise , if a Domain Name is present,
- this will be the domain name with 'pop.' prepended
- to it.
- SMTP Server: Information from the SMTP_SERVER= Tool
- Type if present; otherwise, if a Domain Name is
- present, this will be the domain name with 'smtp.'
- prepended to it.
-
- If a Tool Type was the only default and it is missing,
- nothing is loaded into the corresponding string gadget.
-
- The [CHANGE PASSWORD] button gadget will bring up a special window which
- will allow you to add or change your password. This window looks like the
- follwing:
-
- |========================================|
- |0|Enter Password |
- |----------------------------------------|
- | |
- | Enter your new password below |
- | |
- | [ ] |
- | |
- | |
- | |
- | [START OVER] [ CANCEL ] |
- |________________________________________|
-
-
- The string gadget will be automatically activated when the window is
- displayed. You can type in your new password, but for each character you
- type, an '*' will appear. After hitting return, the heading "Enter your
- password below" will be replaced by the following heading: "For
- verification, re-enter your password". You must re-enter your password
- and, when you hit return, if the re-entered password matches the first
- password, the password window will close. The new password will not take
- effect until you hit the [USE], [SAVE] or [SAVE TO] buttons at the bottom
- of the Configuration screen. If you hit the [CANCEL] button at the bottom
- of the Configuration screen even though the new password has been
- accepted, the new password will not be used.
-
- If the re-entered password does not match, the following will appear below
- the password entry string gadget:
-
- Password failed Validation!
-
- and the "Enter your password below" heading will re-appear.
-
- If at any time you want to start over with entering the new password, you
- can click on the [START OVER] gadget. If you want to cancel the password
- entry process you can either click on the close gadget at the top left of
- the window or on the [CANCEL] gadget in the window.
-
- Only 30 characters can be entered into the password string gadget.
-
-
- TCP/IP Page
- -----------
-
- The TCP/IP page appears as follows:
-
- ==========================================================================
- AEMail Configuration Screen
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- ____________[ TCP/IP ]________________________________________________
- | |
- |Start Net Call: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | [ ] Start Net Opens on the Workbench |
- | |
- | Stop Net Call: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | [ ] Stop Net Opens on the Workbench |
- | |
- | [ ] Automatic connection to Internet Provider on AEMail Start Up |
- | [ ] Display disconnect check on AEMail exit |
- | |
- |Disable Queued Mail Chk [] on connection establishment [] at AEMail exit|
- | Disable New Mail Chk [] on connection establishment [] at AEMail exit|
- | |
- | Check for new mail every [ ] minutes |
- |________________________________________________________________________|
-
- [USE] [SAVE] [SAVE AS] [CANCEL]
-
-
- ==========================================================================
-
- The "Start Net Call" and "Stop Net Call" are required if you are going to
- start up or stop your TCP/IP connection from within AEMail with a script.
- If you are using AmiTCP, this is normally either the file "startnet" or
- "stopnet" in the AMITCP:bin directory. If you are using Miami, two AREXX
- scripts, called "startnet.miami" and "stopnet.miami" have been provided
- with the AEMail archive located in the AEMail program directory.
-
- When first presented, these two string gadgets will contain the values
- given in you STARTNET and STOPNET Tool Types or what was last stored in
- your configuration file. If these two Tool types are not present, these
- two string gadgets will be blank unless a previous configuration file is
- present and has these calls.
-
- If you do not want what is presented as the default in these two string
- gadgets, you can enter the correct path and script name in the string
- gadgets. A full path name to that script must be entered. If the script
- is an AREXX script it should be preceded with "rx " (a space is between
- the rx and the script name). The standard AmiTCP startnet script is NOT
- an AREXX script even though it uses AREXX commands. It is an AmigaDOS
- script. The Miami script which comes with AEMail, on the other hand, is
- an AREXX script.
-
- The [REQ] button will call up a file requester to allow you the find the
- script you want and [CLR] will clear the string gadget.
-
- [DEFAULT] will place the script path and name from your Tool Types in the
- appropriate string gadget.
-
- If you need the "Start Net" script or the "Stop Net" script to open on the
- workbench screen, click on the approriate check mark gadget for the
- particular script. When the TCP/IP Configuration page first opens the
- "Start Net Opens on the Workbench" item will be checkmarked.
-
- SPECIAL NOTE FOR USERS OF TERMITE TCP:
-
- If you are using a TCP/IP stack that does not have a Start Net or Stop Net
- script (such as TermiteTCP), you should use the [CLR] button to clear
- these two string gadgets. Starting and stopping your Internet connection
- is then done manually. Then when you use the Start Net or Stop Net menu
- item, the action that is performed is to iconify AEMail. You can then
- perform the network connection in what ever manner was provided by your
- TCP/IP stack software. Once the connection is made, un-iconify AEMail and
- AEMail will then check your POP Server for any available messages if that
- option was selected (see below).
-
- The "Automatic connection to Internet Provider on AEMail Start Up" check
- box provides the same capability as the AUTOCONNECT Tool Type. When
- AEMail is first activated it attempts to determine if you are connected to
- your Internet provider. If you are not and this item is checked, AEMail
- will automatically run your StartNet script. However, the AUTOCONNECT
- function will be disabled if you do not have a "Start Net" script.
-
- Except when you are using AEMail as a mailto: agent, when AEMail
- terminates and you are still connected to your Internet provider, the
- following Requester will be displayed:
-
- Do you wish to terminate your Host connection now?
-
- You will given the opportunity to reply with either a [YES] or [NO]. If
- you never want you Internet connection to be terminated when you exit from
- AEMail, you can prevent the above requester from being displayed by NOT
- checking the "Display disconnect check on AEMail exit" box. By default,
- this box WILL BE CHECKED, so, to disable the function, you would have to
- click in this box. However, this function will automatically be disabled
- if you do not have a Stop Net script.
-
- Please Note: The way AEMail determines if you are still connected is to
- check if the "bdsocket.library" is present. This library may become
- present when you load your TCP/IP stack software. Even though you may not
- be connected the bdsocket.library will then be present, so you will get
- the above notification even though you are not actually connected. In
- this event replying with either [YES] or [NO] to the requester will have
- no effect.
-
- Whenever AEMail is first loaded and is connected to Internet Provider or
- if you select "Start Net" from the "TCP/IP" menu, a check will be made for
- any mail on your POP server or any mail that must be sent from your QUEUED
- folder. Except when you are using AEMail as a "mailto:" agent, this same
- check is also performed when you quit AEMail. You can disable any of
- these checks by checking the appropriate box in the following lines:
-
- Disable Queued Mail Chk [] on connection establishment [] at AEMail exit
- Disable New Mail Chk [] on connection establishment [] at AEMail exit
-
- AEMail also has the capability for checking for mail periodically on your
- POP server. This function is performed in the background so you can be
- doing other activities while this check is going on. When mail is found,
- the following requester will pop up on your screen:
-
-
- YOU HAVE MAIL!!
-
- n Messages available on the POP Server
-
- Do you wish to receive these messages now?
-
-
- Replying [YES] to the above requester will start the retrieval of the
- messages. If you are in iconify mode when this occurs, the retrieval will
- occur in the background without bringing up the AEMail screen.
-
- You can set the time interval for this check by entering the appropriate
- number of minutes in the following numeric gadget:
-
- Check for new mail every [ ] minutes
-
- The default time interval is 2 minutes. If you enter a zero in this
- numeric gadget, no check will be made.
-
-
- Default Path Page
- -----------------
-
-
- The Default Path page appears as follows:
-
- ==========================================================================
- AEMail Configuration Screen
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- ________________________[ PATHS ]_____________________________________
- | |
- | Mailcap Directory: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | TCP Logging File: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | [ ] TCP Logging Active on AEMail startup|
- | |
- | Retrieve Mail from Directory: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | Save Mail to Directory: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- |Add Attachments from Directory: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- | |
- | Save Attachments to Directory: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT]|
- |________________________________________________________________________|
-
- [USE] [SAVE] [SAVE AS] [CANCEL]
-
-
- ==========================================================================
-
- String gadgets are provided for giving the full path for each of the
- default directories and or file. The directory paths that can be
- specified are:
-
- Mailcap Directory: This is the directory that contains your
- mailcap file. The file will always be named "mailcap".
- The default entry for this is "AEMAIL:".
-
- TCP Logging File: This allows you to enter a file name as well
- as a path. The default path and file name is "tcplog" in
- the AEMail program directory. If this field is cleared, no
- TCP logging can take place. When the [SAVE], [SAVE AS] or
- [USE] gadgets are selected, if TCP Logging was active and
- the TCP logging File name that was entered is different
- from the current log file, the current log file will be
- closed and a new file opened. If you clear this field
- TCP logging will stop since there is no file to log to.
-
- Whether logging takes place or not should depend on the
- "TCP/IP/TCP Logging File/Active" menu item (checkmarked
- flag).
-
- You can cause TCP logging to be active when AEMail starts
- up by checking the "TCP Logging Active on AEMail startup"
- check mark gadget below the TCP Logging File string gadget.
- If this item is checked, the logging will become active
- when you exit from the Configuration screen. You will have
- to turn off the Active flag in the "TCP/IP/TCP Logging File"
- menu item to stop logging.
-
- Note: none of the actions mentioned above will take place
- until you select [USE], [SAVE] or [SAVE TO] at the bottom
- of the Configuration screen. If you select [CANCEL] no
- change will be made in your TCP logging activity.
-
- Retrieve Mail from Directory: This is the initial path that will
- appear in the file requester when you Retrieve mail from a
- file rather than your POP Server. The default directory for
- these files is "PROGDIR:" which is your current AEMail program
- directory. If you regularly are trying to bring in mail that
- was previously transferred using another mail user agent such
- as AmiPOP, AirMail, or Voodoo, you should use the directory
- that was used for these agents for storing mail. You can
- specify any directory of your choosing as the default path
- for the Retrieve Mail file requester. You enter that
- default in this string gadget.
-
- Save Mail to Directory: This is the initial path that will appear
- in the file requester when you select the "Save Mail" icon
- in the command icon strip. The default directory for this
- path is PROGDIR:, which is your current program directory.
- However, you can specify any other path of your choosing as
- the default path for the Save Mail file requester. You enter
- that default in this string gadget.
-
- Add Attachments from Directory: This is the initial path that will
- appear in the file requester when you select the [REQ] button
- in the Add Attachment requester (see below under Section VIII.
- AEMail WINDOWS. The default directory for this path is PROGDIR:.
- However, you can specify any other path of your choosing as
- the default path for the Add Attachment requester. You enter
- that default in this string gadget.
-
- Save Attachments to Directory: This is the initial path that will
- appear in the file requester when you select the [Save] or
- [View & Save] buttons in the Attachment requester (see below
- under Section VIII. AEMail WINDOW. The default directory for
- this path is RAM:. However, you can specify any other path of
- your choosing as the default path for the Attachment file
- requester. You enter that default in this string gadget.
-
- When this this page is first activated, the values that were last saved in
- the current configuration file will be displayed.
-
- The buttons to the side of each string gadget perform the following
- actions:
-
- [CLR] will cause the string gadget to be cleared.
-
- [DEFAULT] will cause default information, as described above, to be
- loaded into the appropriate string gadget.
-
- [REQ] causes a file requester to appear for selecting the appropriate
- directory and file name (TCP Logging File only) to be loaded
- into the appropriate string gadget. The file requester will
- start out with the last path that was used for that particular
- string gadget. If no path was last used, a dummy name of
- "VOLUMES" will be used, the requester will flash, and the
- volumes and assigns will be displayed.
-
-
-
- General Parameters Page
- -----------------------
-
-
- The General Parameters page appears as follows:
-
- ==========================================================================
- AEMail Configuration Screen
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- ___________________________________[ GENERAL ]__________________________
- | |
- |Printer Device: [PRT: ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT] Top Margin:[4 ]|
- | [ ] Include Attachment List in Print Out |
- | |
- | [ Printer Setup ] [Set Screen Mode] |
- | [Set Minimum Headers] |
- | |
- | [ ] Delete Mail from Server [ ] Display Full Header |
- | [ ] Strip Duplicate Messages [ ] Include Header in Reply |
- | |
- | EditCall: [ ][REQ][CLR][DEFAULT] |
- | [ ] Editor Opens on the Workbench |
- | |
- | Default Reply to Message Parameters |
- | |
- | [ ] Quote Original Message Text Quote Prefix[> ] |
- | |
- | Quote Header: [ ] |
- |________________________________________________________________________|
-
- [USE] [SAVE] [SAVE AS] [CANCEL]
-
-
- ==========================================================================
-
- The General Parameter page allows you to set up certain general type
- parameters such as specifications for your printer device, your screen
- mode that you want your AEMail screen to open on, the list of minimum
- headers you want displayed in a message, certain default menu checkmarked
- items, the specification for your editor, and the specifications for the
- default message reply headers.
-
- For the Printer Device you can specify the device that you want to do your
- printing on. By default this is PRT:, but you can specify a file if you
- care to. If you specify a file, your printer output will be sent as
- standard ASCII text with form feeds and margin spacing included in the
- output. The [REQ] button will call up a file requester through which you
- can enter the path and file name of this printer file. [CLR] will clear
- the string gadget and DEFAULT will enter PRT: into the gadget. When this
- page is first displayed, the PRT: default will be in the gadget.
-
- You can also specify the Top Margin of the printout with the numeric
- string gadget to the right of the Printer Device. The default top margin
- is 4.
-
- If you want the list of attachments to appear on the last page of your
- printout, you can check the "Include Attachment List in Print Out" box.
- By default, this box is checked when you first call up the General
- Parameters page.
-
- If you want to modify your printer setup parameters that are normally set
- with your PRINTER PREFERENCES, you can click on the [Printer Setup]
- button. This will call up the standard Printer Preferences program so
- that you can change your printer setup. Please Note that, if you change
- the printer preferences, the new preferences will remain in effect when
- you quit AEMail.
-
- If you want to set your screen mode for AEMail, you can click on the [Set
- Screen Mode] button. This will call up a Screen Mode Requester which will
- allow you to set whatever screen mode you wish. Your overscan mode can
- also be set. This defaults to "OVERSCAN-TEXT". When you save your
- configuration settings, the screen mode you selected and the overscan
- setting are saved in the AEMail configuration file and will be used the
- next time you load AEMail.
-
- The minimum header set that you want displayed in your message can be set
- by clicking on the [Set Minimum Headers] button. This will bring up a
- requester that looks like this:
-
- |==================================|
- |[o] Set Minimum Headers |
- |==================================|
- | Select/Deselect Headers |
- | to be displayed |
- |==================================|
- || *bcc: | ||
- || *cc: | ||
- || Content-Transfer-Encoding: | ||
- || Content-Type: | ||
- || *Date: | ||
- || *From: | ||
- |==================================|
- | Enter New Header |
- |[ ]|
- | |
- | [OK] |
- |==================================|
-
- A list of possible message headers is displayed in the scrollable list.
- An asterick (*) in front of a header indicates that it has been selected
- for inclusion in the minimum header list. Clicking on an item in the list
- will select it with an (*). If it is already selected, it will be
- deselected (the asterick will change to a blank).
-
- The string gadget at the bottom of the requester is used to enter a header
- that is not in the list. Be sure and end the header with a colon (:).
- After entering the header, press return and the header will be placed
- properly in the scollable list. It will be deselected when it is first
- entered in the list. You will have to click on it to select it.
-
- When you are through entering items in the list, click on [OK] and you
- will be returned to the General Parameters page. Clicking on the close
- gadget at to top of the requester has the same effect as clicking on [OK].
-
- Please NOTE: anything you enter in the list or select/deselect will
- remain in the list in that state during the current run of AEMail even if
- you click on [CANCEL] in the main configuration window. In other words,
- [CANCEL] for the minimum header list has the same effect as [USE].
- Clicking on [SAVE] or [SAVE AS] at the bottom of the screen will
- permanently save the headers you have selected.
-
- There is no way to delete a header once it has been entered in the list
- and saved except by deleting the .headers file in the AEMAIL: directory.
- This is really not a problem, however, since, if you entered an incorrect
- header and haven't selected it, it will have no effect on the program.
-
- The four check boxes:
-
- [ ] Delete Mail from Server
- [ ] Display Full Header
- [ ] Strip Duplicate Messages
- [ ] Include Header in Reply
-
- have the same effect as the Tool Types DELETEMAIL=, FULLHEADER=,
- STRIPDUPS=, and HDRINREPLY=. A checked condition is the same as a YES in
- the Tool Type. When you exit from the Configuration screen with either
- [USE], [SAVE] or [SAVE AS], the corresponding menu items will be checked
- or unchecked depending on the state of these check boxes.
-
- For the EditCall string gadget you must use the full path name of the
- editor of your choice plus any parameters you want to use on the call. To
- specify where the file name you are editing goes use '%s'. An example
- would be:
-
- c:ed %s
-
- Below the EditCall: string gadget is a checkmark gadget which is used to
- tell AEMail that your editor will open on the Workbench screen. If your
- editor of choice does not open on it's own screen, you must check this
- item. The AmigaDos editor, ED, does NOT open on it's own screen; therefor
- you must check this item if you are using ED.
-
- The DEFAULT for the EditCall is the information from the EDITOR Tool Type.
- If the key word 'WB;' precedes the editor call information in the tool
- type, the "Editor Opens on Workbench" item will be checkmarked. 'WB;'
- will NOT appear in the EditCall string gadget.
-
- If the EDITOR Tool Type was not provided, the following will be the
- default EditCall:
-
- c:ed %s
-
- and the "Editor Opens on Workbench" item will be checkmarked. This
- uses the default AmigaDos editor, ed.
-
- If you need to find where your editor is located, [REQ] causes a file
- requester to appear for selecting the appropriater program file to be
- loaded into the EditCall string gadget.
-
- The section below the heading "Default Reply to Message Parameters" is
- used to set up the default actions when you are replying to a message.
- The "Quote Original Message Text" box sets up the default action for
- quoting the original text in a message. Even though you take the default
- of not quoting text, you will be given an opportunity to change you mind
- about this when you compose the message.
-
- The "Quote Prefix:" string gadget indicates what is to be placed in front
- of each quoted line if an original message is quoted. This, by default,
- is '>'; however, you can use any other prefix as the derfault that you
- like.
-
- A "Quote header:" will be placed on the line in front of the quoted
- material. You can choose what you would like as the default heading and
- enter it in this string gadget. By default, the header which will
- initially appear in the "Quote Header:" string gadget is:
-
- On &(week), &(date2), at &(time), &(name) wrote:
-
- The & followed by a field name in parenthesis indicates substitution of
- data from the original message's headers. The values that can be
- substituted are:
-
- &(name) The real name of the sender of the original
- message. If the real name is not available,
- the sender's email address will be used instead
-
- &(subject) The subject from the original message. Any RE:
- or (fwd) will be stripped.
-
- &(week) The day of the week that the original message
- was sent.
-
- &(date) The date the original message was sent in the form
- DD MMM YYYY, where DD is the day of the month,
- MMM is month in the form Jan, Feb, Mar, etc, and
- YYYY is the full 4 digit year.
-
- &(date1) Same as &(date).
-
- &(date2) The date in the form MMM DD, YYYY.
-
- &(time) The time the original message was sent in the
- form HH:MM xM where HH is the hour on a 12 hour
- clock, MM is the minute, and xM is AM or PM.
-
- &(to) The email address the message was sent to. For
- mailing lists this could be the name of the mailing
- list if that is what appeared in the To: header.
-
- The "Quote Header" is designed to be modified by the user and can be
- changed with this string gadget. This is a permanent change if you select
- [SAVE] to save the Configuration data or it can be in effect as the
- default for only this running of AEMail if you select [USE]. You can
- always change this default, however, when you compose a message.
-
- V. USING AEMAIL
-
- Starting AEMail
- ---------------
-
- AEMail can be started either from the Workbench by double clicking on it's
- icon or from the shell. It is recommended that AEMail be normally run
- from the Workbench. The shell invocation is primarily designed for
- "MailTo" agents in WWW browsers or to call AEMail from another program
- that passes a message to it.
-
- Starting AEMail from the Shell
- ------------------------------
-
- When AEMail is invoked from the shell, there are six optional argument
- that can be used as follows:
-
- AEMail [email-addr-of-recipient-of-email] [config=configuration_file]
- [pubscr=browser-screen-name] [mail_dir=full-path-to-mail-directory]
- [message=full-path-name-of-message-to-send] [CONT]
-
- If either the recipient's email address is present or the "message="
- argument is present, AEMail assumes that we are using AEMail as a "MailTo"
- agent or you are trying to queue or send a message composed outside of
- AEMail. AEMail will load and immediately display the Compose message
- window.
-
- If the "message=" argument was used, you will be in the "edit" mode of the
- compose screen. You can either edit the supplied message or immediately
- [Save in Pending], [Queue Message], [Send Message Now], or [Cancel
- Message]. You can also perform any other action on the message including
- adding headers, adding attachments, or adding your signature block (see
- the Section VIII, Compose Message Window).
-
- The message that the "message=" argument points to must be a complete
- message with at least one header. It is suggested that you include at
- least a "To: " and "Subject: " header. These should be followed with at
- least one blank line before the body of the message.
-
- If both the "mail address of the recipient" argument and the "message="
- argument are used, the "mail address" will take precedence over the "To: "
- header in the message.
-
- The recipient's name in either the mailto argument or the To header in the
- message referenced by the "message=" argument, can be a nickname present
- in your Address Book. This is a convenient way to send messages to groups
- where you are periodically adding or deleting members from the group.
- Just use the group nickname in the "To: " address to send the message to
- the entire group.
-
- If the "message=" argument is not present but a recipient's email address
- is present, you will enter the compose window in a "new" message mode.
- You must compose a message or Cancel the operation in order to procede.
-
- When you exit from the Compose window by clicking on one of the action
- requesters at the bottom of the window, AEMail will terminate
- automatically unless the "CONT" keyword was present in the argument
- stream. If "CONT" is used, AEMail will continue so that you can perform
- other AEMail functions. You will then have to quit using the "Quit..."
- menu item in the "Project Menu".
-
- The "config=" keyword parameter is used to specify a configuration file
- other that the normal s:aemail.cnfg file. All pertanent data on the
- AEMail configuration to be used will be in this file. If you wish to
- invoke AEMail from the shell and have it run normally (not as a "MailTo"
- agent), you can use the "config=" parameter to direct AEMail to use a
- different configuration file on startup. To use AEMail in this manner,
- you could simply type:
-
- AEMAIL config=[name_of_configuration_file]
-
- The "mail_dir=" is used to override the AEMAIL: assignment for the mail
- directory. You must specify a full path name for this alternate mail
- directory.
-
- If AEMail is used as a "mailto:" agent for your browser and that browser
- passes it's public screen name along with the userid, you can use the
- keyword argument "pubscn=" to specify that public screen. AEMail will
- then bring the browser's screen to the front when AEMail terminates. If
- this argument is missing and the browser opens on it's own screen but does
- not, itself, bring the screen to the front when it returns from the
- "mailto" command, you might have to manually bring the browser's screen to
- the front with the LEFT-AMIGA M key.
-
- When you invoke AEMail from the shell with a email address parameter or a
- "message=" argument, you normally will not be able to use any of the
- AEMail menus or commands unless the "CONT" key word was used. However,
- AEMail will always check for Mail on your POP Server and for Queued
- messages to send before displaying the Compose message screen (see initial
- AEMail action below) and ask for configuration data if required parameters
- are not present in the s:aemail.cnfg file or the config= configuration
- file.
-
- If you invoked AEMail from the shell without any parameters, AEMail will
- behave the same as if it was invoked from the Workbench by clicking on
- it's icon except that tool types will not be utilized. That action is
- described below.
-
- AEMail can be run either in an offline or online mode. This means that
- you do not have to be connected to your Internet provider when AEMail is
- activated. However, to actually receive or send mail via your Internet
- provider, you must have your TCP/IP stack (AmiTCP, TermiteTCP, Miami, etc)
- running and connected to your provider. You can activate AEMail before
- connecting to your provider or after; it makes no difference.
-
- Both a convenient menu item and a command icon have been provided in
- AEMail to start your TCP/IP stack ("TCP/IP/Start Net") after AEMail is up
- and running provided a script can be used to make this connection. If
- a script is not provided for this purpose, AEMail will iconify to allow
- you to start your TCP/IP stack manually. A menu item ("TCP/IP/Stop Net")
- and command icon have also been provided to disconnect your network
- connection.
-
- You can also automatically activate your TCP/IP stack at program startup
- by providing the AUTOCONNECT=YES Tool Type described above or by check
- marking the "Automatic connection to Internet Provider on AEMail Start Up"
- in the TCP/IP Page of the configuration screen. WARNING: for this to
- work, you will need to be able to activate your TCP/IP stack automatically
- by a script.
-
- Activating AEMail from the Workbench
- ------------------------------------
-
- To activate AEMail from the Workbench simply double click on the AEMail
- icon. You can also activate AEMail from the shell, but, if activated in
- this manner, it will not have access to the configuration information
- provided by Tool Types. It does, however, have access to the
- configuration information in the specified AEMail configuration file
- (either s:aemail.cnfg or the file specified with config= in the shell
- calling argument).
-
- AEMail opens on it's own 16 color Public Screen. The Public Screen name
- is "AEMAIL-1". 4 of the colors are defined by the first four colors of
- the workbench screen. The following 8 colors are pre-defined with the
- following colors: Red (13R, 0B, 0G), Green (0R, 15G, 0B), Blue (0R, 0G,
- 15B), Magenta (15R, 0G, 15B), Yellow (15R, 15G, 0B), Orange (15R, 10G,
- 0B), Brown (10R, 5G, 0B), and Purple (9R, 3G, 9B). These colors have been
- preset to provide a consistant color scheme for displaying icons and
- folder tab colors. Under consideration is the possibility of allowing
- these colors to be user settable in the future.
-
- Since multiple windows are opened by AEMail, the program opens on it's own
- screen to allow uniformity in being able to push the screen to the back
- (with all of it's member windows) and back again to the front. The
- LEFT-AMIGA-M key can be used for this purpose.
-
- You can also iconify AEMail with an iconify bar on the Workbench screen.
- A menu item has been provided to perform the iconify action. When this
- menu item is selected, the AEMail screen will disappear and a button bar
- will appear on the Workbench screen with
-
- AEMail (Click on Close or with RMB to restore)
-
- in the title. When the iconified bar is selected, clicking either on the
- close gadget or with the Right Mouse Button (RMB) will restore the AEMail
- screen.
-
- There is also a hotkey provided for iconifying AEMail. This is
- RIGHT-AMIGA-I. This same hot key will also take AEMail out of iconify
- mode. The LEFT-AMIGA-I key will also accomplish this.
-
- Periodically during the running of AEMail, the program will automatically
- switch to the workbench screen for executing certain functions and then
- switch back when the function is complete.
-
- The first thing AEMail does when it is activated is to check to see that
- certain configuration information has been provided. The necessary items
- are:
-
- POP3 UserID
- Password
- Your email address
- SMTP Domain Name
- Edit Call
-
- If these items have not be provided, the following requester will be
- displayed:
-
- The following Configuration items are empty
-
- [list of empty items]
-
- They are required items!
-
- The Pop Server call and the SMTP Server call will also be included in this
- list if the Domain Name is missing.
-
- If this requester is displayed, you will be given the following choices:
-
- [Configure AEMAIL now] [Cancel AEMAIL]
-
- If you were to click on [Cancel AEMAIL], AEMail will terminate. You can
- not proceed any further until you have entered these items with the
- Configuration screen or by providing them as Tool Types.
-
- Clicking on the [Configure AEMAIL now] will bring up the Configuration
- screen which was described previously.
-
- If the PASSPROTECT=YES Tool Type was provided (registered users only) the
- following window will be displayed:
-
- |========================================|
- |0|Enter Password |
- |----------------------------------------|
- | |
- | Enter your new password below |
- | |
- | [ ] |
- | |
- | |
- | |
- | [START OVER] [ CANCEL ] |
- |________________________________________|
-
-
- You must enter your password before you can procede. You will be allowed
- three attempts to enter a correct password. If the correct password has
- not been entered after three attempts, AEMail will terminate. If the
- password is correct, AEMail will continue.
-
- NOTE: since activating the password protection is done by a Tool Type,
- password protection is not available when you activate AEMail from the
- shell. A later version will allow you to set this option with the
- configuration screens, but currently this feature is only available as a
- Tool Type.
-
- After verifying that required configuration information has been provided
- and that correct password has been entered (if required), AEMail will
- check to see if you are connected to your Internet provider. If it is,
- connection will be made to your POP server to see if there are any
- messages available on the server in your mail box. If there are, the
- following requester will appear:
-
- n Messages Available on the POP Server
-
- Do you wish to receive these messages now?
-
- If you click on the [YES] button, those message will be retrieved at this
- point. See the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described in Section VI.
- COMMAND ICON STRIP for details on this process.
-
- If you click on [NO], no message retrieval will take place at this time.
- You will need to retrieve these messages later using the RETRIEVE MESSAGES
- command icon.
-
- After AEMail checks to see if any messages are available on the POP
- Server, it also checks to see if any messages are in the QUEUED folder
- (messages queued to be sent). If there are, the following requester will
- appear:
-
- You have n messages queued to be sent
-
- Do you wish to send these messages now?
-
- If you click on the [YES] button, all of the messages in the QUEUED folder
- will be sent immediately. This is the same as selecting the "Send Queued
- Mail" item under the "Project" menu or selecting the QUEUED FOLDER and
- clicking on the "Send Message Immediately" command icon (see Sections VI.
- Command Icon Strip and VII. AEMAIL MENUS below).
-
- If you click on [NO], the queued messages will not be sent at this time.
- You will need to send these messages later using either the "Send Queued
- Mail" item under the "Project" menu or selecting the QUEUED FOLDER and
- clicking on the "Send Message Immediately" command icon.
-
- If you successfully connected at program startup the following message
- will appear in the Title bar of the AEMail screen:
-
- TCP/IP session started with [Your-POP-Server-Name]
-
- If you were not connected the following message will appear in the Title
- bar:
-
- Not Connected to [Your-POP-Server-Name] Host
-
- You can disable either or both the POP mail check or the queued mail check
- at startup by checkmarking the appropriate items in the TCP/IP Page of the
- Configuration screen.
-
- When AEMail first starts, three windows are opened in horizontal bands on
- the AEMail screen. A window is displayed just below the screen menu/title
- bar and provides a contextual help title bar and a Command Icon Tool Bar.
- This Tool Bar provides icons for accessing the major functions of AEMail
- and consists (from left to right) of the following icons: Display Folder
- List, Display Address Book, Retrieve Messages, Display Previous Message,
- Display Previous Folder's Message List, Display Current Folder's Message
- List, Display Next Folder's Message List, Display Next Message, Compose a
- Message, Queue Message for Later Delivery, Send Message Immediately, Save
- Message To File, Print, Delete/Undelete Message, Copy Messages, Transfer
- Messages, Start TCP/IP Network Connection and Terminate TCP/IP Network
- Connection.
-
- The window below the command icon tool bar contains a "folder strip" set
- of icons. An icon is provided for each folder with a colored "tab" to
- indicate the type of folder (of the user's own choosing). Within each
- folder icon is a short name (not exceeding 9 characters) for that folder.
- Below this is the total number of messages minus any deleted messages. It
- may be followed by the number of un-read messages in parenthesis. If
- there are unread messages, both numbers will be displayed in red. These
- messages counts will be updated as messages are added or deleted from the
- folders.
-
- The height of the folder strip is defined by the font size that is used
- for the folder name and the folder contents. The font and font size that
- is used can be selected by the user with the FLDRFONT= and FLDRFONTSZ=
- Tool Types. The folder icons will adjust accordingly.
-
- Four pre-defined folders are provided: "INBOX" for holding retrieved
- messages, "PENDING" which holds messages that the user is currently
- composing and has not decided to send as yet, "QUEUED" which holds
- completed messages for later transmission, and "SENT" which holds messages
- that have been sent and accepted by the SMTP Server. Since these folders
- must always be present, you can not delete or change the name of these
- folders.
-
- A facility has been provided to allow the user to add as many additional
- folders of his own choosing that he wants to the list of folders. As each
- new folder is created, an icon will be created and placed next to the last
- folder icon. Any number of folders can be created and the "folder strip"
- has the ability to scroll horizontally so that all of the folder icons can
- be viewed and accessed.
-
- You can use the menu items "Transfer..." and "Copy..." under the MESSAGE
- menu to transfer or copy messages between folders.
-
- The last window is placed below the "folder strip" and is used to display
- either folder lists, address books, message lists, or messages themselves.
- If a non-interlaced screen is provided, the message and address book
- displays will start below the Command Icon Tool Bar (overlaying the folder
- strip) rather than below the folder strip. This is done to provide more
- room for the message or address book display since the number of
- displayable lines is limited.
-
- Other windows are also provided which cover the entire screen below the
- title bar for the purpose of providing configuration information and for
- composing messages.
-
- Each of the windows is described in detail in the WINDOW section below.
-
- While the Command Icon Tool Bar and the folder strip are being displayed,
- a contextual help line is provided in the Command Icon Tool Bar window
- title bar below the screen's title bar. As you pass the mouse cursor over
- any command or folder icon, a description of that command or folder will
- be displayed in the window title bar. The main window menu bar should
- also be active whenever the mouse pointer moves to the "folder strip" or
- above.
-
- All command and folder icons are surrounded by a raised box. Whenever a
- command or folder is selected, the box will become depressed.
-
- When AEMail is first activated and you are online and have mail and accept
- it's transfer, the message list for the INBOX folder will be displayed.
- As each mail message is received you will see it added to the message list
- of the INBOX.
-
- If you are offline or there is no mail or mail is not being checked, the
- folder list will be displayed. Double clicking on either the name of a
- folder in the list or one of the folder icons will cause the message list
- for that folder to be displayed.
-
- Double clicking on a message in the message list will cause that
- particular message to be displayed.
-
- If you have selected a time increment in the Configuration screen (the
- default is 2 minutes), a background process will be started which checks
- your POP server every few minutes (as specified by the interval) for
- messages. If there are any messages, the following requester will pop up:
-
-
- YOU HAVE MAIL!!
-
- n Messages available on the POP Server
-
- Do you wish to receive these messages now?
-
-
- Replying [YES] to the above requester will start the retrieval of the
- messages. This requester will only pop up when you are not in the middle
- of some function such as composing a message, transferring or saving a
- message, printing a message, or performing configuration changes. It will
- pop up on the Workbench screen if you have AEMail iconified.
-
- NOTE: if you did not specify that you wanted messages deleted from your
- POP server as you transferred them to your Amiga, the "YOU HAVE MAIL"
- requester will pop up each time the system checks for mail.
-
-
- USING AEMail AS A "MailTo" AGENT
- --------------------------------
-
- A number of Amiga WWW Browsers allow you to select an external Mail agent
- to be used for sending email when a "mailto:" HTML link is specified.
- AEMail can be used as such an external mail agent.
-
- On the configuration screen for your browser specify AEMail as your
- "mailto:" agent by using the full path name of AEMail and the token for
- specifying the "mailto:" email address.
-
- As an example, for Voyager you can specify the following:
-
- Work:AEMail/AEMail %h or
-
- AmiTCP:bin/AEMail %h (if you are using AmiTCP)
-
- as the "mailto:" helper application in the "Network Settings: Other"
- Voyager menu or when you install Voyager. Be sure and save your Voyager
- settings once you make the change.
-
- The "%h" in the above specification is Voyager's token for where to place
- the email address. The specification also assumes that AEMail was
- installed in either the Work:AEMail or the AmiTCP:bin drawer. Use the
- correct full path for where you installed AEMail. Voyager does not
- require a "pubscr=" argument.
-
- Other browsers, if they use this capability, may have a different way to
- specify the "mailto" user agent and the token for specifying where to
- place the email address. The token may change from version to version of
- your browser. Consult your browser documentation for how to do this.
-
- In early versions of AWeb, for instance, you would bring up the "Change
- Settings" menu and select "External programs" in the cycle gadget. You
- entered the "mailto:" application call with two string gadgets. The first
- string gadget specifies the Command string which would be
- "Work:AEMail/AEMail" (again the full path name) and the second string
- gadget specifies the Argument string which would be "%s pubscn=%s". AWeb
- does use the public screen argument. Later versions of AWeb used
- different tokens for these specifications. Consult your AWeb
- documentation for what should be used.
-
- The documentation for IBrowse, unfortunately, does not provide any
- information on how to set up an external "mailto:" agent. However it can
- be done. Follow these steps:
-
- Select the Preferences menu in IBrowse
- Select Network
- Select "Email & Telnet" tab
- Under "Mailto:" Set the External mode
- For the command give the full path name of the AEMail program and
- follow it with %h (like in Voyager)
-
- example: Work:AEMail/AEMail %h
-
- Select O.K.
-
- Be sure to "Save Settings" under the Preferences menu
-
- In order for the "mailto:" agent to work properly, AEMail must NOT be
- running when you start up your browser. When you click on the "mailto:"
- link, AEMail will be loaded, the Compose message window will be displayed,
- you will then be able to compose and send the message, and AEMail will
- terminate.
-
- If you have a custom configuration file, you should also add the argument
- "config=name-of-config-file" to the "mailto" calling argument. As an
- example, using IBrowse or Voyager:
-
- Work:AEMail/AEMail %h config=name-of-file
-
-
- MailTo Using ARexx
- ------------------
-
- Rather than use the "mailto:" capability described above, you can also
- call an ARexx script which calls the Compose function of AEMail. Such a
- script for IBROWSE would be as follows:
-
- /* Arexx AEMail Mailto Compose */
- OPTIONS RESULTS
- parse arg userid a
-
- ADDRESS AEMAIL1
- AEMAIL TO FRONT
- COMPOSE MAILTO userid
- ADDRESS IBROWSE INFO SCREEN
- SCREENTOFRONT result
- if (result = 0) then okay1 "Bad Public Screen"
- exit
-
- This script requires AEMail to be running when the script is called. A
- more sophisticated script could be developed which would automatically
- load AEMail if it was not already loaded.
-
- The above script is saved in the REXX: directory as "mailto.aem". The
- call that is placed in the "Mailto:" in IBROWSE would be:
-
- rx mailto.aem %h
-
- The advantage of using ARexx is that AEMail can be running while you are
- doing your web browsing. If you happen to receive email during this time,
- a requester will then pop up saying that you have mail and asking if you
- want to read it.
-
- In the ARexx script above notice the statement:
-
- ADDRESS IBROWSE INFO SCREEN
-
- This is actually a MUI ARexx commands that will obtain the public name
- of the IBrowse screen. This allows the AEMail Arexx command SCREENTOFRONT
- to bring the IBrowse screen to the front after the email has been sent or
- queued. For any browser that uses MUI, this script will work if you
- change "IBROWSE" to the name of the ARexx Port for that browser.
-
- Editing String Entry Gadgets
- ----------------------------
-
- A number of windows in AEMail use string entry gadgets for entering data.
- These gadgets look like long rectangles with a cursor which allows you to
- type in the data you want. There are a number of special key combinations
- that can aid you in the entry process. These are:
-
- Cursor Left Move cursor to previous character
- Shift Cursor Left Move cursor to the beginning of the string
- Cursor Right Move cursor to next character
- Shift Cursor Right Move cursor to the end of the string
- Del Delete the character under the cursor
- Shift Del Delete from the character under the cursor to the
- end of the line
- Backspace Delete the character to the left of the cursor
- Shift Backspace Delete from the character to the left of the cursor
- to the start of the line
- Return or Enter Terminate input and deactivate the gadget
- Tab Terminate input and activate the next string gadget
- Shift Tab Terminate input and activate the previous string
- gadget
- Right Amiga q Undo (cancel) the last editing change to the string
- (Note: either q or Q will work)
- Right Amiga x Clears the string (either x or X will work)
- Right Amiga v Paste the contents of the current clipboard unit
- to the string (either v or V will work)
- Right Amiga c Copy the string to the current clipboard unit
- (either c or C will work)
- Right Amiga u Change the current clipboard unit
- Right Amiga U Display a list of the current active clipboard
- units and their contents
-
- In addition, the following editing functions are available if the IControl
- preferences editor has "Text Gadget Filter" selected. Note: either the
- upper or lower case alphabetic character will work.
-
- Ctrl A Jump cursor to the start of the string
- Ctrl H Delete the character to the left of the cursor
- Ctrl K Delete from the character under the cursor to the
- end of the line
- Ctrl M Same as Return or Enter
- Ctrl W Delete the previous word
- Ctrl U Delete from the character to the left of the cursor
- to the start of the line
- Ctrl X Clears the string
- Ctrl Z Jump cursor to end of the string.
-
- All of the above characteristics of string editing are standard with the
- Amiga with the exception of those keystrokes that involve the clipboard.
- The clipboard functions are specific to AEMail, although other programs
- may have similar functions using the same key combinations built into
- them. For more information on using the clipboard see "Using the
- Clipboard with AEMail" below.
-
-
- Using the Clipboard with AEMail
- -------------------------------
-
- On the Amiga, the clipboard provides a facility for passing information
- from one program to another, or for saving information for re-use in the
- same program. AEMail utilizes the clipboard in several ways:
-
- Each string entry gadget has the ability of copying the current contents
- of the string to the clipboard or of pasting the contents of the clipboard
- to the string gadget. In that manner information can be saved and re-used
- at a later time.
-
- You can also obtain a line from a message, edit it, and save that to the
- clipboard; or you can save the entire contents of the message body to the
- clipboard. If you are using an editor that also supports the clipboard,
- you can retrieve information that you previously copied to the clipboard
- and insert it into a message you are composing.
-
- If your browser supports the clipboard, you can use the above method to
- capture a URL that is embedded in a message and then paste it into the
- browser's URL string.
-
- AEMail supports the use of multiple clipboards (up to 256 separate
- clipboard units), so different information can be copied to separate
- clipboard units and retrieved later. If other external programs also
- support multiple clipboard units you can pass separate pieces of
- information to those programs.
-
- With each string entry gadget in AEMail you can use "Right Amiga C" or "Right
- Amiga c" (either upper or lower case c) to copy the information from a
- string to a clipboard unit. Likewise, you can use "Right Amiga V" or "Right
- Amiga v" (upper or lower case v) to paste the information into the string
- gadget. This works with all string gadgets except the "Enter Password" or
- "Change Password" (in the Identity page of the Configuration Screen) string
- gadgets.
-
- Generally speaking when you use the paste operation in a string gadget, it
- will replace the contents of the string gadget with the contents of the
- clipboard. The exception to this is with the To:, cc:, and bcc: string
- gadgets on the Compose Message Window and when editing a string that is
- captured from a message (see below).
-
- For the To:, cc:, and bcc: string gadgets, the clipboard data will be
- ADDED to what was previously in the string gadget. Any added email
- addresses added with the paste operation will be separated from the
- previous addresses with a comma.
-
- If you double click on a line in a message that is being displayed, a
- special window will open at the top of the screen which looks like this:
-
-
- |=========================================================================|
- |o| Edit and save message line to clipboard |
- |-------------------------------------------------------------------------|
- | |
- | [Message line appears here ] |
- | |
- | [ SAVE CLIP ] [CHANGE CLIP UNIT] [ CANCEL ] |
- |_________________________________________________________________________| |
-
-
- You can use the copy and paste to and from the clipboard unit while you
- are editing within the string entry gadget above. However, if you paste
- to the string, the data in the clipboard will be inserted at your cursor
- position. This is different from all other string entry gadgets where the
- pasted data replaces whatever was in the string gadget before. This
- feature for the editing and saving of a line from a message can facilitate
- building a clipboard line from different lines in the message. To do
- this, edit the first line so that just the portion that you want added or
- inserted to a second line remains in the string. Copy this to a clipboard
- unit ([SAVE CLIP]). Then double click on a second line. Position the
- cursor where you want the first clipboard data to appear and perform the
- paste operation. The previously copied data will be inserted at that
- point.
-
- When you click on either the [SAVE CLIP], [CANCEL], or the close gadget at
- the top of the window, the edit window will disappear. Clicking on the
- [SAVE CLIP] will save the edited string to the current clipboard unit and
- clicking on the [CANCEL] or close gadget will exit without saving.
-
- Warning: using the copy function from within the string gadget will
- always copy the current contents of the string to the clipboard whether or
- not you click on the [CANCEL] or the close gadget later. There is no way
- to undo this operation. However, using the copy function from within the
- string gadget will not close the edit window.
-
- Clicking on the [CHANGE CLIP UNIT] in the edit window or typing "Right Amiga
- u" (lower case u only) from any string gadget will bring up a special
- window that will allow you to change the current clipboard unit. This
- window looks like this:
-
-
- |=======================|
- |o|Enter Clipboard Unit |
- |-----------------------|
- | |
- | [ ] (0 - 255) |
- | |
- | [ OK ] [CANCEL] |
- |_______________________|
-
-
- You can enter any clipboard unit between 0 or 255 in the numeric gadget.
- If you type RETURN after entering the number or click on [OK], the
- clipboard unit you entered will become the new clipboard unit and the
- window will close. Clicking on the [CANCEL] gadget or the close gadget
- will close the window without changing the current clipboard unit.
-
- Since you may have data stored in multiple clipboard units and may forget
- which clipboard unit has what data, another feature has been provided. If
- you type "Right Amiga U" (upper case U - shift and u) while you are editing
- a string, the Clipboard Display window will be shown which looks like this:
-
-
- |===========================================|
- |o| Contents of Clip List |
- |-------------------------------------------|
- | Clip Contents |
- | ========================================= |
- | | 0 Contents of clip 0 | | |
- | | 2 Contents of clip 2 | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | ========================================= |
- | |
- | [ OK ] [NEW CLIP UNIT] [CANCEL] |
- |___________________________________________|
-
-
- This shows all of the clipboard units that have data stored in them and
- the contents of each clipboard unit in a listview. Clipboard units may be
- skipped as shown in the illustration above. Since the contents of a
- clipboard can be a complete file, the first non-blank line will be
- displayed and leading spaces will be stripped. Only text clips will be
- displayed. Only 40 characters can be displayed. If the line is longer
- than 40 characters, the first 30 characters will be shown followed by
- three periods and the last 7 characters.
-
- Only clips with data will be shown. The current clipboard unit will be
- highlighted if it contains data. Since it is possible to have a clipboard
- unit assigned WITHOUT any data, you may see none of the units highlighted.
- You can change to one of the clipboard units shown by clicking on it (it
- will become highlighted) and then clicking on [OK]. You can also change to
- a clipboard unit not shown by clicking on [NEW CLIP UNIT]. [CANCEL] and
- the close gadget will close the window without any changes taking place.
-
- A further feature of this window is to provide an automatic paste
- capability by double clicking on one of the units being displayed. That
- will automatically paste the contents of the selected unit to the string.
- If the selected clip is a file, only the first non-blank line will be
- pasted and leading spaces will be stripped. The "Right Amiga V" method of
- pasting from within a string gadget also has this feature for multiple
- line files.
-
- Another clipboard feature of AEMail is the ability to save the body of
- messages and text attachments to the clipboard. When you click on the
- [SAVE TEXT] or [ATTACHMENT] button when you are displaying a message you
- will be given the chance to save the text as a CLIP and also to change the
- clipboard unit. See the "Message Display Window" under VIII. AEMAIL
- WINDOWS for a description of the requesters that appear to do this.
-
-
- Filtering Messages with AEMail
- ------------------------------
-
- What is message filtering? Message filtering is the ability to direct
- incoming messages to specific folders or to automatically exclude certain
- messages from being stored in the system.
-
- AEMail has a very powerful message filtering system. It can direct (or
- exclude) messages based upon information in the To:, From:, Reply-To:,
- Subject:, cc:, bcc:, or Date: headers and (for registered users only) any
- other header or text in the body of the message. It can also use the fact
- that a message is a reply, has attachments, or is forwarded as filtering
- criteria. Information in the header or body text that is checked can be a
- word or phrase and wild cards can be used. Information can also be case
- sensitive or insensitive as the user desires.
-
- AND and OR relationships can also be made with information coming from
- different headers.
-
- Filtering criteria is defined in the folder description which can be be
- modified or created by using either the "Edit" or "New" sub-topic under
- the "Folders menu". See the description of the "Filter Selection Window"
- under Section VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS in this documentation for a complete
- description on how to set up the filtering criteria.
-
- Setting up the appropriate filtering criteria for any folder designed to
- receive incoming messages with cause incoming messages (either from your
- POP server or from files) to be stored in that folder rather than the
- INBOX.
-
- Setting up filtering criteria for the INBOX will automatically exclude any
- message meeting that criteria from being stored in the INBOX. In other
- words, filtering criteria in the INBOX is used to prevent certain messages
- from being stored on your system.
-
- Filtering criteria can not be set up for folders designed for messages
- sent out of your system. Only messages as they are being received are
- checked. Filtering is done "on the fly" as a message enters the system.
-
- VI. COMMAND ICON TOOL BAR
-
- Below is a description of the "command icon tool bar" and the fuctions
- that it performs:
-
-
- Display Folder List
- -------------------
-
- This icon looks like a file cabinet. Clicking on the icon will cause the
- folder list to be displayed in the lower window. This list shows each
- folder with its short name (INBOX, PENDING, etc), a description of the
- folder, the number of unread mesages in the folder, and the total number
- of messages in the folder.
-
- Unlike the count displayed in the folder icon, the total number of
- messages includes any messages marked for deletion.
-
-
- Display Address Book
- --------------------
-
- This icon looks like a closed book with the letter A on its cover.
- Clicking on this icon will display the Address Book window.
-
- Each address book entry contains three fields: Nickname, Real Name, and
- UserID (Address). In addition, entries can be provided for groups with a
- distribution list. The group is identified with the heading "DISTRIBUTION
- LIST" along with the number of items in the list in the top most UserID
- field. The UserID's for the members of that list are shown below that
- heading.
-
- For items in the distribution list, real UserID's or Nicknames can be
- used. An item in the distribution list can also be another distribution
- list (In this case, only a Nickname can be used). All nicknames are
- expanded to Real Name and UserID when mail is sent.
-
- A checkbox item, called "Expand" to the right of the Address Book headings
- allows the user to either expand and show all members of the group or
- shrink the address book so that only the group header is displayed. This
- item is normally checked indicating the groups are in expanded mode. If
- the check mark is removed, the group entries will shrink showing only the
- group headings. This feature is only available to registered users.
-
- Currently, address book entries are sorted by Nickname and group entries
- are interspersed with single entries. Also Real Names are presented as
- first name followed by last name rather than last name, first name.
-
- If you are displaying a message, or have a message selected, when you
- click on the Address Book icon, the "Reply-To:" address, if present, will
- be transferred to the UserID address in the Address Book. If the
- Reply-To: address is not present, the From: address will be used. If a
- Real Name is present in the address it also will be transferred. You can
- force the From: address to be transferred by holding down the shift key
- when you click on the Address Book icon. This process facilitates
- transferring names and UserIDs to the Address Book. Please keep in mind
- that Reply-To: addresses normally do not have real names associated with
- them, but From: addresses many times do. If you want the real name you
- may have to hold down the shift key when you click on the Address Book
- icon.
-
- The first time AEMail is loaded, a special Address Book entry with a
- nickname of "AEMAIL" is created. This entry can be used to send bug
- reports and messages about AEMail to my email address.
-
- Address book data is stored in a file in your AEMail directory called
- ".addrbook".
-
- A more complete description of the Address Book window is given later
- under Section VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS, Address Book Window.
-
-
- Retrieve Messages
- -----------------
-
- This icon looks like an envelope with an arrow coming in. When selected,
- AEMail will attempt to connect to the POP host server and transfer any
- mail at the server to your Amiga.
-
- If you are in offline mode (you are not connected to your Internet Service
- Provider or AEMail can not connect, for some reason, to your POP server),
- you will see a requester that asks:
-
-
- !! We are running in Offline mode !!
-
- Do you wish to receive messages from files?
-
-
- Clicking on [NO] will terminate the retrieval process.
-
- Clicking on [YES] will bring up a file requester which will allow you to
- select one or more files. The default directory for these files is
- "AMITCP:" since it is assumed that you are trying to bring in mail that
- was previously transferred using another mail user agent such as AmiPOP,
- AirMail, or Voodoo; however, you can switch to any other directory and
- bring in any file that is in email text format. You can also change the
- default directory for retrieving off-line mail with the Path Parameters
- page on the Configuration screen.
-
- AEMail automatically recognizes mail stored as individual messages or as
- message streams (such as stored by AmiPOP). The only requirement is that
- the message stream must separate messages with data beginning:
-
- ...<LF><LF>From [UserID]
-
- where [UserID] is the UserID specified in the USERID= tool type or with
- the Required Parameters page on the Configuration screen.
-
- This also works with message streams saved by the "Save Message to File"
- or the "Export.." item in the messages menu.
-
- It is also assumed that lines have been stored in the file ending in <LF>
- and not <CR><LF> (<CR> is $0D and <LF> is $0A).
-
- If you encounter a message stream that does not use the above to separate
- messages, please report what was used and what product was used to create
- the message stream. A copy of the message stream on floppy or sent to me
- as an email attachment would be very handy.
-
- If you are connected to your Internet Service Provider and connection can
- be made to your POP mail server, all messages stored on the server will be
- transferred to the Amiga. They will be stored as individual messages in
- the AEMAIL: directory with cryptic file names.
-
- A progress window will also be displayed which will show the number of the
- current message being received, the total number of messages being
- received, the percentage of the current message already received and the
- total bytes in the message being received. The percentage will be shown
- as both a number and a graphic slider.
-
- This progress window also has an [ABORT] button which allows you to
- terminate the receipt of the current and all remaining messages from your
- POP Server.
-
- PLEASE NOTE: The abort process only aborts the receipt of messages into
- the AMIGA, It does NOT abort the transfer of data from the POP Server.
- While AEMail disconnects from the server, the server may be unaware of
- this and continue to send the remainder of the message. If AEMail
- attempts to re-establish contact with the Server while it is still sending
- the message AEMail may start to receive the middle of the previously
- requested message. AEMail has been programmed to recognize this and will
- temporarily report that the POP connection could not be established. Once
- the POP Server finishes transferring the message, it should become
- available for another connection.
-
- The progress window will be shown both when retrieving messages from your
- POP server and from files, however, if you are retrieving a message
- stream, AEMail will not be able to correctly determine the number of
- messages being retrieved. Therefor the "n of n" indicator will be
- incorrect.
-
- If mail on the server is to be deleted, the "Delete Host Mail" item in the
- Retrieve Messages menu must be checked. If this menu item is not checked,
- mail will NOT be deleted on your POP server. This has no effect when you
- are retrieving messages from a file. NOTE: the AEMail Installation
- script automatically defaults to deleting host mail. You will have to
- un-check this item if you want to keep mail on your POP Server.
-
- Since old mail may not be deleted on your server, a menu item has been
- provided under the Retrieve Messages menu called "Excl Dup Msgs". When
- this item is checked duplicate messages from the mail server which are
- currently stored in any incoming folder will not be stored again. The
- only folders not checked for duplicate messages are the PENDING, QUEUED
- and any folder designed to hold SENT messages. Again, the default action
- with the installation script is to delete duplicate messages.
-
- Currently, like sending messages to your Internet provider, the retrieval
- process is run in the same execution mode as AEMail. This means that all
- of the messages must be received from the POP host before any other AEMail
- process can take place. Again, a future version will move the retrieval
- process to a background process so you can proceed with other AEMail
- functions while retrieval takes place.
-
- You can be running another program on your Amiga, however when the message
- retrieval takes place. If you are in iconify mode when retrieval takes
- place it will be done totally in the background although you will see the
- "You have mail" requester (see below).
-
- Every time a new message is retrieved AND stored, the total and new
- message counts in the folder list AND the folder icon strip will be
- updated. Also the top title bar will display the following message:
-
- Message n of n retrieved[/deleted] from [POP server/file], [not] saved
-
- The first n indicates the current message number and the second n
- indicates the total number of messages being retrieved. (NOTE: This
- message will also appear when local mail files are being transferred, but
- the counts may not be accurate if you are retrieving from a message
- stream. Also, the retrieval process from local files is so fast, you may
- only see the message for the last retrieval.)
-
- The [/deleted] will appear if the message has been deleted on the POP
- server and [not] will appear if the message was a duplicate and was not
- saved.
-
- You can check for messages on your POP server and retrieve these messages
- manually any time you wish by clicking on the RETRIEVE MESSAGES icon.
- Also, the user has the option of retrieving messages automatically when
- AEMail is first activated (provided you are connected to your Internet
- provider), each time you execute your "startnet" script from within
- AEMail, and when you quit AEMail.
-
- You can also set a time interval in minutes in which AEMail will
- periodically check for new mail. This function is done in the background
- and if one or more messages are on your POP server, the following
- requester will pop up:
-
-
- YOU HAVE MAIL!!
-
- n Messages available on the POP Server
-
- Do you wish to receive these messages now?
-
-
- Replying [YES] to the above requester will start the retrieval of the
- messages. This requester will only pop up when you are in the main AEMail
- screen and are not in the middle of some function such as composing a
- message, transferring or saving a message, printing a message, or
- performing configuration changes.
-
- NOTE: if you did not specify that you wanted messages deleted from your
- POP server as you transferred them to your Amiga, the "YOU HAVE MAIL"
- requester will pop up each time the system checks for mail.
-
- Display Previous Message
- ------------------------
-
- This icon is a long yellow backward arrow. When you are displaying a
- message, clicking on this icon will display the previous message in the
- message list. If you are at the first message in the list, a requester
- will be displayed informing you of this.
-
- A more complete description of the message display window is given under
- Section VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS, Message Display Window.
-
-
- Display Previous Folder's Message List
- --------------------------------------
-
- This icon is a short backward arrow. Clicking on this icon will display
- the previous folder's message list.
-
- A description of the message list is given under Section VIII AEMAIL
- WINDOWS, Message List Window.
-
- Display Current Folder's Message List
- -------------------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a folder. Clicking on this icon will display the
- current folder's message list. This is one way to get back to the current
- message list when you are displaying a message and the folder list is
- obstructed.
-
- A description of the message list is given under Section VIII AEMAIL
- WINDOWS, Message List Window.
-
- Display Next Folder's Message List
- ----------------------------------
-
- This icon is a short forward arrow. Clicking on this icon will display
- the next folder's message list.
-
- A description of the message list is given under Section VIII AEMAIL
- WINDOWS, Message List Window.
-
- Display Next Message
- --------------------
-
- This icon is a long yellow forward arrow. When you are displaying a
- message, clicking on this icon will display the next message in the
- message list. If you are at the last message in the list, a requester
- will be displayed informing you of this.
-
-
- A more complete description of the message display window is given under
- Section VIII AEMAIL WINDOWS, Message Display Window.
-
-
- Compose A Message
- -----------------
-
- This icon looks like a sheet of paper with a pen on it. The Compose a
- Message function brings up the Compose Message window which is described
- under Section VIII AEMAIL WINDOWS, Compose Message Window. In this window
- you will enter information about the message you are about to compose.
- The information you enter includes the Nickname or UserID of the
- receipient of the message, the subject and whether or not you want to send
- cc's to anyone.
-
- A special [Call Address Book] button is provided that allows you to call
- up an abreviated version of the Address Book. By clicking on an address
- book name you can transfer the nickname for that address to any of the
- To:, cc:, or bcc: fields. You select the field you want to transfer the
- nickname to by a special cycle gadget in the address book display.
-
- When the Address Book is displayed from the Compose window, all groups
- will show as the group header and number of entries in that group. For
- AEMail registered users, an [Expand] checkmarked gadget will allow you to
- expand the groups so you can see all of the entries. Exiting from the
- Address Book display is accomplished by double clicking on an address (it
- will be transferred to the appropriate field and then the Address Book
- will be closed) or by clicking on the Close gadget in the window border or
- at the bottom of the window.
-
- To compose the message text you would click on the [Compose/Edit Message]
- which will call up your editor. When you save and exit from the editor,
- you will be brought back to the Compose Message window.
-
- You can specify the format that you want you text to be sent as. You can
- select between 8-bit, 7-bit, quoted-printable, or encoded binary (BASE64).
- This facilitates sending messages with foriegn character sets through
- gateways that only handle 7 bit data. The default is 8 bit. Both
- "quoted-printable" and "encoded binary" are 7 bit schemes for representing
- 8 bit data. When you display a message which is in either
- "quoted-printable" or "encoded binary", it will be displayed correctly.
-
- You can also specify any attachments you want to send with the message
- through the Add Attachment Requester or you can specify a signature file
- or additional headers.
-
- After supplying the required information, you can then save your message
- into either the PENDING or QUEUED folder or send it directly. If you
- select [Send Message Now] you MUST be connected to your Internet provider.
-
- If a message has been selected in any folder, except the PENDING, QUEUED,
- or SENT folders, before clicking on the COMPOSE MESSAGE icon, the compose
- will be treated as a reply to the selected message. The original Reply-To
- address for the message you are replying to will appear in the To: field
- on the Compose window. If the Reply-To: address is not present the From:
- field will be used as recipient of the reply. You can force the From:
- field to be used by holding down the shift key when you click on the
- Compose icon.
-
- If you are not interested in creating a reply, you can change to creating
- a new message to be sent to the same (or different) recipient, or you can
- forward the message to a different recipient.
-
- If the message selected was in the PENDING or QUEUED folder, you will be
- allowed to either edit the selected message or create a new message. If
- you edit the message it will be stored back into the the folder you
- selected or will be sent (if you click on [Send Message Now]. The old
- message will be automatically removed from the system.
-
- If the message selected was in the SENT folder you will only be able to
- create a new message.
-
- Queue Message For Later Delivery
- --------------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a mailbox. This function is provided to allow the
- user to mark messages that you want sent later. Normally, NO MORE EDITING
- OF THESE MESSAGES should occur once they are moved to the QUEUED folder.
- However, AEMail does allow this to occur. Messages can be moved back to
- the PENDING folder with the "Transfer..." item in the Messages menu.
- Messages for queuing must come from the PENDING folder. The messages can
- also be placed in either the PENDING or QUEUED folders (or sent) by the
- Compose Message window.
-
- You can send these messages manually from the QUEUED folder any time you
- want by either sending the entire folder or individual messages in the
- folder. This is done by selecting the QUEUED folder and clicking on the
- SEND IMMEDIATE icon (see above) or by selecting the "Send Queued Mail"
- item under the PROJECT menu.
-
- AEMail also allows the user the option of sending queued messages
- automatically when AEMail is first activated, or when the program
- terminates provided you are connected to your Internet provider (see
- Section V. STARTING AEMAIL, above). It will also perform this check when
- you make connection to your Internet provider through the StartNet script
- unless you have disabled this feature with the TCP/IP Parameters page of
- your Configuration screen.
-
- With this option you can compose messages when you are in an off-line
- mode, save them in PENDING while you are working on them, and then QUEUE
- them when you are satisfied with the message you want to send. The Queued
- messages are then automatically sent when you log onto your Internet
- Provider by the StartNet command.
-
- If messages are selected in the PENDING folder when you click on the QUEUE
- MESSAGE icon, a requester will appear that asks:
-
- Do you wish to queue the entire pending folder
- or just selected messages?
-
- The choices available are:
-
- [ENTIRE FOLDER] [SELECTED MESSAGES] [CANCEL QUEUING]
-
- If no messages have been selected (or if all of the messages have been
- selected), the entire PENDING folder will be queued without a requester
- appearing. Deleted messages in the PENDING folder are never queued.
-
- If there are no undeleted messages in the PENDING folder a notification
- requester will appear that indicates that "No messages available to
- queue".
-
- The messages that are selected will be placed in the QUEUED folder and
- removed from the PENDING folder.
-
- Send Message Immediately
- ------------------------
-
- This icon looks like an envelope with an arrow going out. An attempt will
- be made to send the Selected Message(s) to their recipients. The messages
- to be sent must be in either in the PENDING or QUEUED folder. The
- messages will be sent from the PENDING folder only if the PENDING folder
- is selected; otherwise they will be sent from the QUEUED folder.
-
- If messages are selected, a requester will appear that asks:
-
- Do you wish to send the entire [pending/queued] folder
- or just selected messages?
-
- The choices available are:
-
- [ENTIRE FOLDER] [SELECTED MESSAGES] [CANCEL SEND]
-
- If no messages have been selected or all of the messages in the folder are
- selected, the entire selected folder will be sent without a requester
- appearing. Deleted messages are never sent.
-
- If there are no undeleted messages in the selected folder a notification
- requester will appear that indicates that "No messages available to send".
-
- A check will then be made to see if you have an active connection to your
- Internet provider. If you do not, a requester will be displayed which
- informs the user that we are in offline mode and that the messages can not
- be sent.
-
- If you are connected to your Internet Provider, a message will appear in
- the top title bar that says "Connecting to SMTP Host to send mail". Once
- the SMTP connection is made. AEMail will display "Starting to send n
- messages" where n is the number of messages selected to send. If we are
- unable to connect or an error is reported back from your Internet
- provider, a message will appear in the title bar showing the nature of the
- error and the messages will not be sent.
-
- Sometimes, if the error message is from your Internet Provider, you will
- not be able to see all of it. If your TCPLOG is active, you will be able
- to see it on the Log File, however.
-
- A progress window will also be displayed which will show the current
- number of the message being sent, the total number of messages being sent,
- the percentage of the current message already sent and the total bytes in
- the current message being sent. The percentage will be shown as both a
- number and a graphic slider.
-
- If there is more than one recipient for the message, the progress
- indicator will also show "Sending to n of n recipients of message" as each
- recipient of the message is contacted. This way you will see the progress
- of contacting recipients for large groups of recipients.
-
- This progress window also has an [ABORT] button which allows you to
- terminate the sending of the current and all remaining messages to your
- SMTP Server.
-
- All nicknames used in To:, cc:, and bcc: header fields will be expanded
- to the form: Real Name<userid>. Group nicknames will be expanded to the
- Real Names and userids of all members of the group, or, if "Send Header
- Only" is set for that group, only the group header will be displayed in
- the To: field.
-
- When each message is successfully sent, the following message will be
- displayed in the upper title bar:
-
- Mail n of n successfully sent to [To: addressee]
-
- The n in the above message indicates the message number and the total
- messages to be sent. The [To: addressee] indicates who the message was
- addressed to. If it was addressed to multiple addressees, the first
- addressee will appear followed by ", et al...".
-
- The message will also be placed in the SENT folder and marked as deleted
- in the PENDING or QUEUED folder.
-
- In the current version of AEMail, the send process operates in the same
- execution mode as AEMail. This means that you can not perform any other
- AEMail operation until the message is either rejected by your Internet
- provider or successfully received by your provider (unless you abort the
- process). In a future version, this process will be moved to a background
- process so that you can perform work in AEMail while the sending of the
- message proceeds.
-
-
- Save (Export) Message To File
- -----------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a diskette. A message must be selected before
- activating this function and multiple messages can be selected. A message
- that is currently being displayed is considered a selected message.
-
- You can save multiple messages as a block of messages or as individual
- messages. If you have selected multiple messages a requester will be
- displayed as follows:
-
- More than one message marked to save
-
- Do you want to save them as a group
- or Individually
-
- If you select Individually
- a File Requester will appear
- for each message
-
- [Save as Group] [Save Individually]
-
-
- Unless you are saving the messages as a group, a requester will also be
- displayed for each message which will describe the message as to Date,
- From, To, and Subject and ask you if you want to perform the requested
- action. Selecting [SAVE] will display a file requester in which you will
- be asked to enter the file name you want the message saved as, and
- selecting [CANCEL] will not save the current message.
-
- If you are saving the message as a group, only the file requester will
- appear.
-
- The complete message, including all attachments, is saved in the format in
- which the message was received from the POP server except that
- CARRAGE-RETURN/LINEFEED sequences are stored as LINEFEEDs alone. Also,
- the message ending sequence (.<CR><LF>) is eliminated and any embedded
- ..<CR><LF> are changed to .<LF> as they would normally appear in a
- message.
-
- If the messages are saved as a group, each message will have a special
- header separating it from the following message. This header consists of
- a line feed followed by:
-
- From [your UserID]@[Your POP Server name] [date]
-
- Only the special header (not the line feed) will appear for the first
- message.
-
-
- This facilitates importing a group of messages back into AEMail. (See
- the Retrieve Messages command and the menu item From Local File... under
- the Retrieve Msgs menu.)
-
- If you want to save the body of the message or an attachment in its
- converted format, you can do that with either the [SAVE TEXT] gadget in
- the message display window or with the Attachment Requester that can be
- brought up when you display a message with attachments (see Attachment
- Requester under VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS below).
-
-
- Print
- -----
-
- This icon looks like a printer. You must select the messages you want
- printed prior to selecting this icon. Multiple message selection works
- with this command. If no messages have been selected, you will be asked
- if you want to print a list of the messages in that folder. Also, if this
- icon is selected while you are in the Address Book, the address book
- contents will be printed.
-
- Each of the messages will be printed in the order that they appear in your
- message list. All selected messages will be printed whether they are
- marked for deletion or not.
-
- A progress indicator will appear as each message is being sent to your
- printer which shows the percent being printed and the total bytes being
- printed. This progress indicator has an [ABORT] button which allows you
- to terminate the printing. However, beware, most printers have a
- substantial buffer which will probably receive all of your messages quite
- quickly. Once the messages are in the printer's buffer, the printing can
- not be cancelled without turning your printer off.
-
- A heading line will be printed on each page of the listing which contains
- the following information:
-
- Message Sent on MM/DD/YY (DOW) at HH:MM [AM/PM], [from/to] [name] Page n
-
- where
-
- MM/DD/YY is the date the message was sent (received) or composed,
- DOW is the day of the week the message was sent (received) or
- composed,
- HH:MM is the hour and minute the message was sent (received) or
- composed using a 12 hour clock,
- [AM/PM] is either AM or PM.
- [from/to] if the message was received you will see "from", and if you
- composed or sent the message you will see "to",
- [name] the full name of the sender or nickname of recipient,
- n is the the page number.
-
- On the first page only, if there are attachments, the following line will
- appear below the heading line:
-
- This message has attachments (See last page for list).
-
- On a separate page after the message, the attachment list will appear,
- providing the "Include Attachment List in Print Out" item is checkmarked
- in the General Parameters portion of the Configuration screen. Printing
- the attachment list is the default action.
-
- If attachments are a Text or Message type and are either 7-bit, 8-bit, or
- quoted-printable encoding format they will be printed following the body
- of the message. Other types of attachments you will have to save to a
- file and print the file with an appropriate printing program.
-
- Note: no check is made whether a selected message is deleted or not. If
- a deleted message is selected it will be printed anyway (this is probably
- desireable in certain circumstances). If you don't want to print it,
- de-select it!
-
- This function can also print a list of all messages in a folder. To do
- this, DO NOT select any messages in the folder. A requester will appear
- when you select either the printer command icon or the Print menu item
- which says:
-
-
- No messages selected to print!
-
- Do you want to print a list
- of all the messages in the
- [name of folder] folder?
-
- [YES] [NO]
-
- By selecting [YES] you will print a list of the messages. Messages will
- be printed in the order that they appear in the message list.
-
- Selecting [NO] will terminate the printing function.
-
- Printing uses your Preferences Printer. You should set it up properly
- before executing AEMail, but you can set it up while in AEMail by using
- the General Parameters page on the Configuration screen. You can also
- specify a print file that the output will be directed to.
-
- As a default AEMail will space 4 lines down before starting to print.
- This "Top Margin", however, can be changed in the General Parameters page
- of the Configuration screen.
-
-
- Delete/Undelete Messages
- ------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a garbage can. This will delete OR undelete all
- messages that have been selected in a message list. Whether deleting or
- undeleting takes place depends on the current status of the message. If
- it is currently marked for deletion, it will be undeleted.
-
- This function only marks (or unmarks) messages for deletion. The messages
- will actually be deleted only when AEMail exits. The message counts in
- the folder icons, however, will only represent undeleted messages. You
- can also suppress the display of deleted messages in the message list by
- unchecking the Show/Deleted Messages item under the Messages menu.
-
- Copy Selected Messages to a new folder
- --------------------------------------
-
- This icon looks like two sheets of paper, one laying over the other. This
- will copy all selected messages from the selected folder to a new folder.
- When you select this icon a Notification window appears which says:
-
-
- Select Folder to Copy Messages To!
-
- [CANCEL]
-
-
- When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
- folder you want the messages copied to. The window will automatically
- disappear at that time.
-
- The selected messages will be copied to that folder. Messages will remain
- in both folders.
-
- Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
- operation.
-
- As the messages are being copied, the folder message list that the
- messages are copied to will be displayed (unless a message is being
- displayed). Once the copy is complete, the folder message list from which
- the messages are copied will be displayed unless a message is being
- displayed.
-
-
- Transfer Selected Messages to a new folder
- ------------------------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a sheet of paper with arrows pointing to the right.
- It will move all selected messages from the selected folder to a new
- folder. When you select this icon a Notification window appears which
- says:
-
-
- Select Folder to Transfer Messages To!
-
- [CANCEL]
-
-
- When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
- folder you want the messages transferred to. The window will
- automatically disappear at that time.
-
- The selected messages will be copied to that folder, and the messages in
- the folder from which the messages are copied will be marked as "deleted".
-
- Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
- operation.
-
- As the messages are being transferred, the folder message list that the
- the messages are transferred to will be displayed (unless a message is
- being displayed). Once the transfer is complete, the folder message list
- from which the messages are copied and deleted will be displayed unless a
- message is being displayed.
-
-
- Start TCP/IP Network Connection
- -------------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a horizontal jagged line. This will start your
- network connection to your Internet Provider using your StartNet script.
- It performs the same function as the "Start Net" item under the TCP/IP
- menu (see below under Section VII, AEMAIL MENUS.
-
- Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection
- -----------------------------------
-
- This icon looks like a horizontal jagged line with a red slash through it.
- This will terminate your network connection to your Internet Provider
- using your StopNet script. It performs the same function as the "Stop
- Net" item under the TCP/IP menu (see below under Section VII, AEMAIL
- MENUS.
-
- VII. AEMAIL MENUS
-
- Below is a list of all the current menus and menu sub-items and a description
- of their functions:
-
-
- Project menu
- ------------
-
- Configuration...
-
- This has five submenu items for controlling your configuration.
- These sub-menu items are:
-
- Open...
-
- This brings up a file requester which allows you to specify
- a configuration file other than the standard "s:aemail.cnfg"
- file. Once you have opened this configuration file it
- becomes your current active configuration.
-
- Edit...
-
- The Configuration screen will be activated allowing complete
- configuration data to be entered for the current active
- configuration file. See the description of the
- Configuration screen previously under the IV. CONFIGURATION:
- section in this document for details on the configuration
- screen.
-
- Save
-
- This will save the current configuration settings in the
- currently active configuration file. It serves the same
- purpose as the previously "Save Settings" menu item (AEMail
- versions prior to 1.13) in which all of the current settings
- including the current state of the "Display Full Hdr",
- "Incl Hdr in Resp", "Excl Dup Msgs" and "Delete Host
- Mail" menu items.
-
- Save As...
-
- This is the same as "Save" except that a file requester
- will be brought up which allow you to rename the current
- active configuration file. The new name becomes the
- new current active configuration file.
-
- Restore Default
-
- This reads in the s:aemail.cnfg file OR the file specified
- in the CONFIG= Tool Type OR the config= parameter on the
- Shell call to AEMail. The particular file that is used
- is referred to as your "base configuration". The base
- configuration now becomes your currently active
- configuration file.
-
-
- Send Queued Mail
-
- Will send all messages in the QUEUED folder. See the
- SEND MESSAGE IMMEDIATELY command in the COMMAND ICON STRIP
- section above. This action will also occur automatically
- when you first load and when you exit AEMail provided you
- are connected to your Internet provider.
-
- Send AREXX/DOS Command...
-
- This will bring up a requester that looks like this:
-
- |=====================================================|
- |o| Send AREXX/DOS Command |
- |=====================================================|
- | |
- | |@| AREXX |[ ][V][CLR][REQ] |
- | |
- | [ ] Opens On Workbench [X] Execute Asynchronously |
- | |
- | [ OK ] [ CANCEL ] |
- |=====================================================|
-
- The cycle gadget has two states: AREXX and DOS. Select the kind of
- command (execute script or program) you want to start. The string
- gadget to the right of the cycle gadget is for entering the command.
- Unless the command (program or script) is in the same directory as the
- AEMail program or REXX: (if it is an ARexx command script), you must
- include the full path name. The last command you executed will always
- appear in this string gadget when you first call up the requester.
-
- The [V] gadget is used to call up a listview of the past commands you
- have executed. You can click on one of these if you want to use a
- previous command. The last command you executed will always appear at
- the top of the list. The list of commands (up to the last 10) will be
- maintained even after you quit AEMail. This list will close when you
- click on any item in the list or, if you don't want any of the items,
- when you click into any of the other gadgets in the requester.
-
- Yhe [CLR] gadget will clear the string gadget and the [REQ] will call
- up a file requester with which you can select the program or script
- you want to execute. The initial directory that is used in the
- requester is the PROGDIR: if it is a DOS command or REXX: if it is an
- ARexx command.
-
- The two checkmark gadgets on the second row are used for DOS commands
- only. They will be disabled for ARexx commands.
-
- If "Opens on Workbench" is checked, a switch will be made to the
- Workbench screen when the command is executed. This is not necessary
- for ARexx command since there is an AEMail ARexx command that will do
- this.
-
- The "Execute Asynchronously" checkmark gadget is used to execute the
- DOS command in the background. This will allow AEMail to function
- when the program that is called is being executed. This item is, by
- default, checkmarked. If for some reason you want AEMail to freeze
- while the command (program) is being executed, you can un-checkmark
- this item. Since all ARexx command automatically execute in the
- background, this item is uneccessary for ARexx command scripts.
-
- When you are ready to execute the command, click on [OK]. If you want
- to cancel the operation, click on [CANCEL].
-
- Send Last Command
-
- This menu item will send the last ARexx or DOS command without
- bringing up the "Send AREXX/DOS command" requester.
-
- Iconify AEMail
-
- You can iconify AEMail with an iconify bar on the Workbench screen
- with this menu item. When this menu item is selected, the AEMail
- screen will be closed and a button bar will appear on the Workbench
- screen with
-
- AEMail (Click on Close or with RMB to restore)
-
- in the title. When the iconified bar is in selected mode, clicking
- either on the close gadget or with the right mouse button will restore
- the AEMail screen.
-
- Initially the iconify bar will open at the top center of the
- Workbench screen, but it can be dragged anywhere on the screen.
- AEMail remembers where you dragged the bar so the next time
- you iconify, the bar will be at that new position.
-
- There is also a hotkey provided for iconifying AEMail. This is
- RIGHT-AMIGA-I. This hot key, and also LEFT-AMIGA-I, will also
- restore the AEMail screen when in the iconify mode.
-
- When in iconify mode, periodic checking of mail on your POP server
- is still done. If mail is found, the "YOU HAVE MAIL" requester
- will pop up on the Workbench mail. You can retrieve the mail
- immediately by clicking on the YES gadget. The requester will
- disappear and retrieval of messages will occur in the background
- and no progress indicator will appear. When you return to the
- AEMail screen, the new messages will be in your INBOX folder.
-
- You can also push the AEMail screen to the back exposing the
- screen immediately behind the AEMail screen or the WorkBench
- screen by hitting LEFT-AMIGA-M when the AEMail screen is being
- displayed. This is standard Amiga action.
-
- If the AEMail screen has been pushed to the back, hitting
- LEFT-AMIGA-M will bring the screen forward. Note: if other
- screens, besides the Workbench screen, are also present, they
- may be moved to the front first so that you may have to hit
- LEFT-AMIGA-M several times before the AEMail screen appears.
-
- Since there is no screen to bring forward, this will not work
- if the iconify action has been taken.
-
-
- About...
-
- This will display the name, version, and date, of the program
- followed by the ARexx Port Name and information as to whether or not
- the shareware registration message has been received and who the
- version is registered to (with serial number).
-
- Below that is information on how to contact the author of the
- program.
-
-
- Quit...
-
- Exits AEMail.
-
- When this menu item is selected, AEMail first checks to see
- if you are connected to your Internet provider. If you are, a
- connection will be made to your POP server to see if there are
- any messages available on the server. If there are, the following
- requester will appear:
-
- n Messages Available on the POP Server
-
- Do you wish to receive these messages now?
-
- If you click on the [YES] button, those message will be retrieved
- at this point. If you click on [NO], no message retrieval will take
- place.
-
- After AEMail checks to see if any messages are available on the
- POP Server, it also checks to see if any messages are in the
- QUEUED folder (messages queued to be sent). If there are, the
- following requester will appear:
-
- You have n messages queued to be sent
-
- Do you wish to send these messages now?
-
- If you click on the [YES] button, all of the messages in the QUEUED
- folder will be sent immediately. If you click on [NO], the queued
- messages will not be sent.
-
- After checking for POP messages and QUEUED messages, the following
- requester will appear:
-
- Do you wish to terminate your Host connection now?
-
- Selecting the [YES] button will cause the "stopnet" script to be
- executed terminmating your TCP/IP connection to your Internet
- provider.
-
- You can disable all of these requesters with a checkmarked item
- in the TCP/IP display on the Configuration screen. If they are
- disabled, the [NO] action will be assumed which each of the
- requesters.
-
- Finally, a requester will be displayed that asks:
-
- Do You Really Want to Quit?
-
- Clicking on [YES] will terminate the program and [NO] will return to
- the program.
-
- When AEMail exits, all messages marked for deletion will be
- deleted and any configuration files in which data has been updated
- will be re-written. You will probably see a great deal of disk
- activity at this time. While this disk activity is going on, a
- window will be displayed on the Workbench screen saying:
-
-
- Updating all AEMail Configuration Files!
-
-
- When updating is complete, this window will disappear.
- WARNING: DO NOT turn your computer off while this window is being
- displayed. If you do your disk will be corrupted!
-
-
- Folders menu
- ------------
-
- New...
-
- The Configure Folder window will be activated indicating that a new
- folder should be created. See the description of the Configure Folder
- window later in this document for details on how to create a new
- folder.
-
- Edit...
-
- The Configure Folder window will be activated indicating that the
- current selected folder description should be edited. The current
- selected folder is the folder that has a depressed frame. You can
- change the selected folder by single clicking on the appropriate
- folder icon or selecting a folder from the folder list. See the
- description of the Configure Folder window later in this document for
- details on how to change the folder description.
-
- Delete...
-
- This will delete the folder that has been selected. You will not be
- able to delete a folder that has active messages in it. If there are
- only deleted messages in the folder, the messages will be immediately
- deleted along with the folder. There is no way you can get these
- deleted messages back.
-
- Set Sort Key...
-
- Activates the Set Sort Key window for the current selected folder.
- See the description of the Set Sort Key window later in this document
- for details on how to set the folder sort keys.
-
- Remove DELETED msgs
-
- This will IMMEDIATELY remove ALL messages marked for deletion in the
- current active folder. This means that they will no longer appear in
- the message list for that folder and they will be physically deleted
- from your mail directory.
-
- Before actually removing the messages the following requester will
- appear:
-
- This will remove all deleted messages in the
- [folder_name] folder
- If you continue you can not retrieve them!
-
- You will given the option to either [CONTINUE] or [CANCEL]. If you
- select [CONTINUE] all the messages marked for deletion in the folder
- will be removed. [CANCEL] will abort the operation.
-
- A busy pointer will be displayed while the messages are being removed.
-
-
-
- Messages menu
- -------------
-
- Show
-
- This has two checkmarked submenu items for controlling your message
- list display. These sub-menu items are:
-
- Deleted Messages
-
- If this sub-item is checked, deleted messages will be shown in the
- message list. If it is unchecked, deleted messages will not be
- shown. This sub-item is checked when AEMail first comes up.
-
- UnRead Msgs Only
-
- If this sub-item is checked, only unread messages will be
- displayed in the message list. If it is unchecked all messages
- will be displayed. This sub-item is unchecked when AEMail first
- comes up.
-
- Compose...
-
- Activates the Compose Message window, described later in this
- document, to create a NEW message to be sent whether or not a message
- is currently selected.
-
- Reply
-
- Activates the Compose Message window to reply to the current selected
- message. See the description of the Compose Message window later in
- this document.
-
- There are two sub-menus which are:
-
- Use Reply-To...
-
- The Reply-To: address of the selected message will be used as the
- recipient of the reply. If the Reply-To: address is not present,
- the From: address will be used.
-
- Use From...
-
- This forces the From: address to be used as the recipient of the
- reply.
-
- If a message is not selected when one of the sub-menu items is
- activated an error requester will appear.
-
- Forward...
-
- Activates the Compose Message window to forward the current selected
- message. See the description of the Compose Message window later in
- this document.
-
- If a message is not selected when this menu item is activated an error
- requester will appear.
-
- Edit...
-
- Using this menu item will allow you to edit a message selected in
- either the PENDING or QUEUED folders. It has the same effect as
- clicking on the Compose icon when you have selected a message in
- either the PENDING or QUEUED folders.
-
- If you have not selected a message in either the PENDING or QUEUED
- folder when this menu item is activated an error requester will
- appear.
-
-
- Select None
-
- This menu item will de-select all messages in the selected folder.
-
- Select All
-
- This menu item will select all messages in the selected folder.
- Selected messages will be marked with an asterick (*) in the first
- position of the message in the message list display.
-
- Last Selected
-
- This menu item will re-select those messages that were last selected.
- If you did a multiple selection on a group of messages and then
- performed an operation on the group of messages (such as deleting,
- copying, saving the group to a file, etc.), the messages will be
- de-selected as the operation is performed on each message. The "Last
- Selected" menu item will allow you to re-select the same previously
- selected messages so that you can perform another operation on the
- same group of messages.
-
- Export...
-
- Same as the SAVE MESSAGE TO FILE command described previously in this
- document.
-
- Copy...
-
- This menu copies all selected messages from the selected folder to a
- new folder. When you select this menu a Notification window appears
- which says:
-
-
- Select Folder to Copy Messages To!
-
- [CANCEL]
-
-
- When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
- folder you want the messages copied to. The window will automatically
- disappear at that time.
-
- The selected messages will be copied to that folder. Messages will
- remain in both folders.
-
- Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
- operation.
-
- As the messages are being copied, the folder message list that the
- messages are copied to will be displayed (unless a message is being
- displayed). Once the copy is complete, the folder message list from
- which the messages are copied will be displayed unless a message is
- being displayed.
-
-
- Transfer...
-
- This menu moves all selected messages from the selected folder to a
- new folder. When you select this menu a Notification window appears
- which says:
-
-
- Select Folder to Transfer Messages To!
-
- [CANCEL]
-
-
- When the window appears, click on the folder icon that represents the
- folder you want the messages transferred to. The window will
- automatically disappear at that time.
-
- The selected messages will be copied to that folder, and the messages
- in the folder from which the messages are copied will be marked as
- "deleted".
-
- Clicking on [CANCEL] before clicking on a folder will cancel the
- operation.
-
- As the messages are being transferred, the folder message list
- that the the messages are transferred to will be displayed (unless a
- message is being displayed). Once the transfer is complete, the
- folder message list from which the messages are copied and deleted
- will be displayed unless a message is being displayed.
-
-
- Print
-
- Same as the PRINT SELECTED MESSAGES command described previously in
- this document.
-
-
- Delete/Undelete...
-
- Same as the DELETE/UNDELETE MESSAGE command described previously in
- this document.
-
- Display Full Hdr
-
- This is a checkmarked menu sub-item. When checked, all message
- headers will be displayed in the message. Since many of these headers
- are somewhat cryptic and could be confusing and not always understood
- by the user, the normal action is display only certain header lines.
- The default action is to display the following headers: From:,
- Reply-To: To:, Date:, Subject:, Organization:, cc:, and bcc:, but you
- can control this default minimum header list with the General
- Parameters page of the Configuration screen.
-
- This menu sub-item is very useful for debugging purpose to see all of
- the headers what any particular message carries.
-
- The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the aemail.cnfg
- file whenever the "Save Settings" menu item is selected. It can also
- be set or reset by the General Parameters page on the Configuration
- screen.
-
- Incl Hdr in Resp
-
- This is a checkmarked menu sub-item. When checked the minimum header
- lines will be included for the quoted message when composing a
- response. If it is not checked, no header information will appear.
-
- The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the aemail.cnfg
- file whenever the "Save Settings" menu item is selected. It can also
- be set or reset by the General Parameters page on the Configuration
- screen.
-
-
-
- Retrieve Msgs menu
- ------------------
-
- From POP Host
-
- This will only retrieve messages from the POP Server. See the
- RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described previously in this
- document for a full explanation of the retrieval process.
-
- If your TCP/IP software is not active or connection to the
- POP Server can not be made, the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command
- will return silently with the information that the POP Server
- could not be reached in the title bar.
-
- From Local File...
-
- This will only retrieve messages from a local file. No attempt
- will be made to connect to the POP Server. See the
- RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described previously in this
- document for a full explanation of the retrieval process.
-
- This menu sub-item allows you to retrieve messages from files
- even when online (connected to a host through your TCP/IP
- software).
-
- Excl Dup Msgs
-
- This is a checkmarked menu sub-item. When checked, duplicate
- messages (ones that were previously retrieved and stored in one
- of AEMail's folders), will not be stored. See the description
- under the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command for the use and full explanation
- of the function of this item.
-
- The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the aemail.cnfg
- file whenever the "Save Settings" menu item is selected. It can
- also be set or reset by the General Parameters display on the
- Configuration screen.
-
-
- Delete Host Mail
-
- This is a checkmarked menu sub-item. When checked mail
- retrieved from your POP Server will be deleted after it is
- retrieved. If it is not checked, mail will not be deleted
- and you will have to use the "Exl Dup Msgs" checkmark item
- discussed above to insure that a duplicate message are not
- retrieved the next time you retrieve messages.
-
- The current state of this checkmarked item is saved in the aemail.cnfg
- file whenever the "Save Settings" menu item is selected. It can
- also be set or reset by the General Parameters display on the
- Configuration screen.
-
-
-
- TCP/IP menu
- -----------
-
- Start Net
-
- This menu item makes connection to your Internet Provider. It
- executes the script that has been assigned by the Start Net
- Tool Type or the TCP/IP page of the Configuration screen. If
- no Start Net script has been assigned, the action that is
- performed is to iconify AEMail. You can then perform the
- network connection in what ever manner was provided by your
- TCP/IP stack software. Once the connection is made, un-iconify
- AEMail.
-
- When this menu item is selected and a "startnet" script has been
- assigned, the system will, by default, switch to the workbench
- screen and execute the "startnet" script. This allows the initial
- dialing window to display. Once your Internet connection has been
- made the system will switch back to the AEMail screen.
-
- You can control the switching to the workbench screen by a check-
- marked item in the TCP/IP Parameters page on the Configuration
- screen.
-
- If you are using AmiTCP, the script that should be run is
- AmiTCP:bin/startnet; although the user may specify a different script
- and path with the STARTNET Tool Type or in the TCP/IP Parameters page
- on the Configuration screen.
-
- If you are using Miami, a "startnet.miami" script has been provided
- for connecting with your Internet provider. This is usually run from
- the AEMail program directory. This is an AREXX script so you will
- have to precede the script name with "rx " (see Section IV,
- CONFIGURATION for setting up your Start Net script). This is set up
- automatically with the AEMail install provided a Miami: assignment is
- in the system.
-
- If you are using a TCP/IP stack that does not have a Start Net script
- (such as TermiteTCP), you should be sure that the Start Net call
- gadget in the TCP/IP parameters page of the Configuration screen has
- been cleared. Your Internet connection is then done manually as
- explained above.
-
- Once a connection is made to your Internet provider and you have
- returned to the AEMail screen, a connection will be made to your POP
- server to see if there are any messages available on the server. If
- there are, the following requester will appear:
-
- n Messages Available on the POP Server
-
- Do you wish to receive these messages now?
-
- If you click on the [YES] button, those message will be retrieved at
- this point. See the RETRIEVE MESSAGES command described in Section
- VI, COMMAND ICON STRIP above for details on this process.
-
- If you click on [NO], no message retrieval will take place at this
- time. You will need to retrieve these messages later using the
- RETRIEVE MESSAGES command icon.
-
- After AEMail checks to see if any messages are available on the
- POP Server, it also checks to see if any messages are in the QUEUED
- folder (messages queued to be sent). If there are, the following
- requester will appear:
-
- You have n messages queued to be sent
-
- Do you wish to send these messages now?
-
- If you click on the [YES] button, all of the messages in the QUEUED
- folder will be sent immediately. If you click on [NO], the queued
- messages will not be sent.
-
- After the connection is made, the following message will be displayed
- in the screen's title bar:
-
- TCP/IP Session started with [your-domain-name].
-
- If for any reason the connection can not be made, the following
- message will be displayed in the screen's title bar:
-
- TCP/IP connection to [your-domain-name] failed.
-
- The "Start TCP/IP Network Connection" command icon will perform the
- same operation as the "Start Net" menu item.
-
- Stop Net
-
- This menu item terminates the connection to your Internet Provider.
- It executes the script that has been assigned by the Stop Net Tool
- Type or the TCP/IP page of the Configuration screen. If no Stop Net
- script has been assigned, the action that is performed is to iconify
- AEMail. You can then terminate the network connection in what ever
- manner was provided by your TCP/IP stack software. Once the
- connection is terminated, un-iconify AEMail.
-
- When this menu item is selected and a "stopnet" script has been
- assigned, the system will terminate the connection silently in
- the background. Since no action is required by the user (unlike
- "startnet"), the screen display will remain on the AEMail screen.
-
- If you want to switch to the Workbench screen while the connection is
- being terminated, you can do this through a check-marked item in the
- TCP/IP Parameters page on the Configuration screen.
-
- If you are using AmiTCP, the script that should be run is
- AmiTCP:bin/stopnet; although the user may specify a different script
- and path with the STOPNET Tool Type or in the TCP/IP Parameters page
- on the Configuration screen.
-
- If you are running Miami, a "stopnet.miami" script has been provided
- for terminating the connection with your Internet provider. This
- script is usually run from the AEMail program directory. This is an
- AREXX script so you will have to precede the script name with "rx "
- (see Section IV, CONFIGURATION for setting up your Stop Net script).
- This is set up automatically with the AEMail install provided a Miami:
- assignment is in the system.
-
- If you are using a TCP/IP stack that does not have a Stop Net script
- (such as TermiteTCP), you should be sure that the Stop Net call gadget
- in the TCP/IP parameters page of the Configuration screen has been
- cleared. Your Internet connection is then terminated manually as
- explained above.
-
- The following messages will be displayed in the screen's title bar
- when the connection is terminated:
-
- TCP/IP session with [your-domain-name] terminated.
-
- The "Terminate TCP/IP Network Connection" command icon will perform
- the same operation as the "Stop Net" menu item.
-
- TCP Logging File
-
- This has three submenu items for controlling your TCP Logging file.
- Please read Section X. AEMAIL FILES, TCP Trace Log File for how to
- read the entries in this file.
-
- The sub-menu items are:
-
- Active
-
- This is a checkmarked menu sub-item which indicates whether the
- TCP Logging is active or not. If a TCP Logging File has not been
- defined with the Configuration screen, this sub-item is ghosted.
-
- Clicking on this item when it is not checkmarked will activate TCP
- Logging. Clicking on it when it is checkmarked will deactivate
- logging.
-
- Purge
-
- This is a handy way to delete all previous TCP Logging entries.
- "Purge" will delete the current logging file and open another file
- with the same name if logging is active. If logging is not
- active, the current logging file will be deleted, but a new file
- will not be opened until the Active sub-item is checkmarked.
-
- This menu item can be used whether the logging file is currently
- active or not.
-
- Display/Edit...
-
- "Display/Edit" will call your editor to display the current TCP
- logging file. The logging file MUST NOT be Active in order to
- display or edit it. If it is active you will get a requester that
- informs you that you can't display the file beause it is active.
- If this happens, de-activate it by turning off the Active
- checkmark and then try the "Display/Edit" again.
-
- If a TCP Logging file has not been defined in the Paths page of
- the Configuration screen, you will receive a requester saying that
- it is not present.
-
- NOTE: The TCP logging file can become quite large and it may take
- some time for your editor to bring in the file. Some editors are
- slower than others in this regard. If you are using the AmigaDos
- editor (Ed), you will see a series of astericks (@) moving across
- the screen as the file is being read in. You might want to
- periodically purge the file (if it is always active), to prevent a
- very large TCP Log file from being created.
-
-
-
- VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS
-
- Configuration Screen
- --------------------
-
- See Section IV. CONFIGURATION for a description of the Configuration
- Screens.
-
-
- Folder List Window
- ------------------
-
- The Folder List window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
- screen when AEMail is first loaded and whenever you click on the DISPLAY
- FOLDER LIST icon in the Command Icon Strip.
-
- The Folder List window looks like the following:
-
- =====================================================================
-
- Folder List
-
- Name Description of Folder Not Read Total
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
- INBOX Messages Received nnnnn nnnnn| |
- PENDING Messages composed and pending for action nnnnn| |
- QUEUED Messages Queued to be sent nnnnn| |
- SENT Messages that have been sent nnnnn| |
- xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx nnnnn nnnnn| |
- xxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx nnnnn nnnnn| |
- | |
- =====================================================================
-
- The folder list is a scrolling list. Double clicking on any of the
- folders in the list will bring up the Message List window for that folder.
- If the Folder Icon strip is also being displayed, double clicking on any
- particular folder icon will also bring up the message list for that
- folder.
-
- If there are too many folders to fit in the window, you can scroll the
- list by using the scroll bar, clicking on the up or down arrows below the
- scroll bar, or by using the up or down cursor keys.
-
- Additionally the following keys can be used to move the list as follows:
-
- "Home" or "Cursor Left" moves the listview to the top.
- "End" or "Cursor Right" moves the listview to the botton.
- "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up. The
- top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
- line of the new page.
- "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
- The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
- top line of the new page.
- The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
- the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
- feature.
-
- Single clicking on a item in the list or folder icon merely selects that
- folder. The selected folder is then the folder referenced by the Folders
- Menu group items (Edit.., Delete..., Set Sort Key ...) and by such
- commands as Message Delete, Message Copy, Message Transfer, or Message
- Select All/NONE.
-
- One of the folders is always active (selected). On program startup, the
- active folder will be INBOX. You can always tell the current active
- folder by the depressed frame around the folder icon.
-
-
- Message List Window
- -------------------
-
- The Message List window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
- screen whenever you double click on either an item in the folder list or
- one of the folder icons.
-
- You can also bring up the current folder list by clicking on the
- "Display Current Folder's Message List" command icon in the command icon
- tool bar. The previous and next folder's message list can also be
- displayed from the command icon tool bar.
-
- The Message List looks like the following:
-
- ========================================================================
-
- Message List for [folder-name] Folder ([folder Description...])
-
- FLGS Date Time From Size Subject (nnn messages)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------
- NARF MM/DD/YY HH:MM xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- *NARF MM/DD/YY HH:MM xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- . . . . . | |
- NARF MM/DD/YY HH:MM xxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- | |
- ========================================================================
-
-
- The column header line displays the number of messages in the folder as
- (nnn messages). This is the total number of messages including those
- marked for deletion.
-
- The message descriptions are presented in a scrollable list. You can
- scroll the list by using the scroll bar, clicking on the up or down arrows
- below the scroll bar, or by using the up or down cursor keys.
-
- Additionally the following keys can be used to move the list as follows:
-
- "Home" or "Cursor Left" moves the listview to the top.
- "End" or "Cursor Right" moves the listview to the botton.
- "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up. The
- top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
- line of the new page.
- "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
- The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
- top line of the new page.
- The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
- the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
- feature.
-
-
- The meaning of the various fields of each message description are as
- follows:
-
- FLGS: (starts in the 2nd column)
- N indicates an unread message
- A indicates a message with attachments (NOT IMPLEMENTED)
- R indicates the message is a reply
- F indicates the message is a forwarded message.
- D (in the same position as N) indicates the message is
- a deleted message.
-
- Date: This is the message date from the DATE: header in the form of
- MM/DD/YY (2 digit month, 2 digit day, and the last 2 digits of
- the year).
-
- Time: This is the time the message was received in the form of HH:MM
- (2 digit hour, 2 digit minute). Time uses a 24 hour clock.
-
- From: Is the Real Name (if present) from either the From: or To:
- header. If the folder represents messages being sent from
- AEMail (PENDING, QUEUED, SENT) then this field will be headed
- "To" and the To: header will be used. If the Real Name is
- not present in the header, then the UserID will be used
- instead. If a Nickname is being used for a message being
- sent, then the Nickname will appear.
-
- Size: This is the size, in bytes, of the message in the form nnn,nnn.
- If the size exceeds 999,999 bytes then ***,*** will appear.
- The size includes the size of the message with all its
- attachments.
-
- Subject: Up to 39 characters from the Subject: header after RE: and
- (fwd) are stripped. You can tell if the message is forwarded
- or is a reply by examining the FLGS field. RE: and (fwd) are
- stripped from the Subject: header to allow sorting to place
- all messages with the same subject (whether original, replied,
- or forwarded) together. You can also control where 'replied'
- and 'forwarded' messages go in the list since these use
- separate sorting criteria.
-
- An asterick (*) in the first position indicates that the message is
- selected. This position will be blank if the message is not selected.
-
- The Message list can be sorted under a number of different categories (see
- Set Sort Keys window below).
-
- Double clicking on any message in the message list will bring up the
- message display window for that message.
-
- A single click will highlight and select the message. An asterick will
- appear in the first column of the line indicating the message is selected.
- You can click on another message to highlight and select that message.
- Clicking on a message that is already selected will deselect the message.
-
- If you are running under AmigaDOS 3.0 or higher, you can also select (or
- deselect) a group of messages by drag selecting. Place the cursor over
- the message you first want to select or deselect and then, holding down
- the left mouse button, drag either up or down. Whether selecting or
- deselecting occurs depends on the state of the first message you select.
-
- Only one message is highlighted. If that message is selected it will be
- considered the current message to reply to, forward, or edit when
- composing messages.
-
- Other operations such as DELETE/UNDELETE MESSAGE, SAVE/EXPORT MESSAGES,
- COPY MESSAGE, TRANSFER MESSAGE, PRINT SELECTED MESSAGES, SEND MESSAGE
- IMMEDIATELY, and QUEUE MESSAGE FOR LATER DELIVERY will use the entire
- selected list of messages.
-
-
- Folder Configuration Window
- ---------------------------
-
- The Folder Configuration window will be displayed over the entire screen
- below the top title line when either the "New..." or "Edit..." menu items
- are selected from the Folders menu.
-
- The Folder Configuration window looks like the following:
-
- =====================================================================
-
- Folder Name: [ ] (1 - 9 Characters only) [SORT KEYS]
-
- Folder Description: [ __ ]
- | |___
- Tab Color: [@| Red | |______| [ ] Folder for Sent Messages
-
- =================================================================
- |Filter Parameters for Selecting Messages |
- =================================================================
- | |
- | [ ] Not [ ] Start Group [ ] Ignore Case |
- | |
- | For [@| To: ] [@| Contains ] [] END |
- | |
- | Search [ ] [] AND |
- | |
- | [ ] End Group [] OR |
- | ___________________________________________________________ |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | |^| |
- | |_________________________________________________________|V| |
- | |
- | [ Add ] [Insert] [Modify] [Delete] |
- | |
- =================================================================
-
- [ SAVE ] [CANCEL]
-
- ====================================================================
-
- If you are editing an existing folder, the Folder Name will be filled in,
- but the string gadget will be disabled. You will not be able to modify
- it.
-
- If you are creating a new folder you must name it with a 1 to 9 character
- folder name. This will appear below the folder icon in the folder strip
- and in the folder list.
-
- The [SORT KEYS] button is used to call the Set Sort Keys window (see
- below) to set the sort keys for the folder.
-
- The folder description can be up to 99 characters, but of course that many
- characters will never appear anywhere. Up to 52 characters will appear in
- the folder list display under "Description of Folder". This will also
- appear in the contextual help line in the window bar preceded by "Folder
- for"
-
- The Tab Color is a cycle gadget with the following possible values: Red,
- Green, Blue, Yellow, Orange, Magenta, Brown, or Purple. This provides a
- color on the folder tab to help classify the folders according to the
- user's preferences. The actual tab color will be displayed to the right
- of this cycle gadget.
-
- The checkbox gadget marked "Folder for Sent Messages" is used to indicate
- when a folder is for messages that have been sent or ready to be sent
- rather than in-coming folders. The PENDING, QUEUED, and SENT folders all
- have this box checked.
-
- The special window in the center of the Folder Configuration window is
- used to set filter parameters for this folder. A full description of how
- this works is given below under "Filter Selection Window". The filtering
- parameters are used to distribute in-coming messages to various folders.
- For the INBOX, these filters have a special meaning which will reject any
- message meeting the filtering criteria. The heading for the filtering
- criteria for the INBOX will read "Filtering Parameters for Rejecting
- Messages" instead of "Filtering Parameters for Selecting Messages".
-
- Since filtering can only occur with in-bound messages, folders for sent
- messages can not have filtering parameters associated with them. For all
- folders for "sent" messages, all of the gadgets in the filtering window
- will be disabled preventing the entry of any filtering information. This
- is true of the PENDING, QUEUED, and SENT folders as well as any folders that
- have been added with the "Folder for Sent Messages" box checked.
-
- Finally, you are given the choice of canceling the operation or saving the
- folder data in the folder.config file with the [CANCEL] and [SAVE]
- buttons.
-
- Filter Selection Window
- -----------------------
-
- The filter selection window for setting filter parameters looks like this:
-
- =================================================================
- |Filter Parameters for Selecting Messages |
- =================================================================
- | |
- | [ ] Not [ ] Start Group [ ] Ignore Case |
- | |
- | For [@| To: ] [@| Contains ] [] END |
- | |
- | Search [ ] [] AND |
- | |
- | [ ] End Group [] OR |
- | ___________________________________________________________ |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | | | |
- | | |^| |
- | |_________________________________________________________|V| |
- | |
- | [ Add ] [Insert] [Modify] [Delete] |
- | |
- =================================================================
-
- The gadgets in the top half of the window are used to enter filtering
- parameters. The first two checkmark gadgets ([ ] Not, [ ] Start Group)
- and the [ ] End Group checkmark gadget at the bottom of the group are
- currently disabled. They are designed to be used for advanced selection
- criteria that will be added to a future version of AEMail.
-
- The cycle gadget which is prefaced with "For" is used to select the header
- that you want to check. This gadget has the following states:
-
- To:
- From:
- Reply-To:
- Subject:
- cc:
- bcc:
- Date:
- Msg is Reply
- Msg w/Attachments
- Msg is Forwarded
- Other Message Hdrs (Registered Users only)
- Message Body (Registered Users only)
-
- Note: it is unlikely that you would see the bcc: header in an incoming
- message even though it is contained in the header list.
-
- To the right of this is a cycle gadget which specifies the condition this
- header will be checked for. For the To:, From:, Reply-To: Subject:, cc:,
- and bcc: headers, Other Message Hdrs, and Message Body the condition can
- be either:
-
- Contains, or
- Does Not Contain
-
- For the Date: header it can be one of the following conditions:
-
- Equal
- Not Equal
- Greater Than
- Greater Than / Equal
- Less Than
- Less Than / Equal
-
- and for Msg is Reply, Msg w/Attachments, Msg is Forwarded it can be:
-
- Is Present
- Is Not Present
-
- The argument to be searched against is entered into the string gadget that
- is titled "Search". For the To:, From:, Reply-To:, Subject:, cc:, and
- Bcc: headers and the "Other Message Hdrs" and "Message Body" you can
- enter an argument that has wild cards. The wild cards that are used are
- as follows:
-
- ? matches any single character.
- c* matches zero or more occurances of character c. If an unknown
- character is to be matched you can use ?*.
- c+ matches one or more occurances of character c (at least one
- occurance of c must be present).
- \? matches the character ?.
- \* matches the character *.
- \+ matches the character +.
-
- Any other characters must match exactly (except that case can be ignored -
- see below). The match can occur anywhere in the header. The following
- are some examples of how the match occurs:
-
- abc matches "abc", "abcdef", or "xxabc"
- ab*c matches "ac", "abc", "abbc", or "abbbc", etc. Characters may
- be present either before or after the match.
- ab+c matches "abc", "abbc", or "abbbc", etc. Characters may be
- present either before or after the match. This will not match
- "ab+c". You would have to use "ab\+c" for this to occur.
- ab?* matches a substring starting with "ab" and ending with "c".
- Characters may be present either before or after the match.
- ab\*c matches "ab*c" only. However charcters may be either before
- or after the match.
-
- WARNING: Please pay particular attention to the characters +, ?, and *.
- If any of these characters appear in the information to be matched, you
- must use \+, \?, or \* in the argument if you want an exact match to
- occur.
-
- If "Other Message Hdrs" is used, you probably would want to use the Header
- designation as part of the search argument.
-
- Searching on header data will search the entire string of characters
- contained within that header even though that header may span multiple
- lines. This means that if an address you want to locate is contained in
- the nth line of the To: header, it will be found.
-
- When searching data in the message body, the entire argument must be found
- in a single line of the body. If you are searching for a multiple word
- phrase which may be broken up onto more than one line, you should specify
- multiple arguments with AND separating the arguments.
-
- If you want to ignore the case of the header or message body data when the
- comparison is made check the "Ignore Case" item. The "Ignore Case" item
- will only ignore the case of the 26 alphabetic characters of the
- American/English alphabet. It will not ignore the case of special
- characters used in forign alphabets although these special characters can
- be used in the Search criteria.
-
- The Search argument for the Date: header can be of one or two formats.
- The first format is either:
-
- dd mmm yyyy or
- mmm dd yyyy
-
- mmm is the three character month abbreviation: jan, feb, mar, apr, may,
- jun, jul, aug, sep, oct, nov, or dec. You can enter either upper case,
- lower case, or mixed case month abbreviations (i.e., jan, JAN, or Jan are
- all o.k.).
-
- dd is the numeric digits for the day of the month and yyyy must be the
- full 4 digit year. If you want any day of a particular month to be used,
- leave off the dd parameter. Likewise, using just the 4 digit yyyy will
- accept any month and day for that year.
-
- The absence of any of the elements of the date (mmm, dd, or yyyy) will
- indicate that that particular element should not be checked. As an
- example: if you want only messages for the month of September to be
- placed in a particular folder you would enter:
-
- sep
-
- by itself and the condition would be entered as "equal to". This would
- capture messages with a Date header of September of any year (Sep 1997,
- Sep 1998, etc.). If you were interested in messages with a Date: header
- of September of 1997 you would enter:
-
- sep 1997
-
- An alternate method of entering the date would be:
-
- mm/dd/yy or
- mm/dd/yyyy or
- mm-dd-yy or
- mm-dd-yyyy
-
- mm is a one or 2 digit month (1 or 01 to 12), dd is a one or 2 digit day
- (1 or 01 to 31) and yy is either a 2 digit or 4 digit year. 0 is invalid
- for any of the mm, dd, or yy. If you want to indicate the absence of any
- of the elements use xx or XX. As an example, to capture messages with a
- Date header equal to any day within September 1997 you could enter:
-
- 09/xx/97
-
- Before the search for a Date: header is made, the date in the Date: header
- is converted to an internal format. The search argument is also converted
- to this same internal format so that the match can be performed correctly.
-
- The Search argument for Msg is Reply, Msg w/Attachments, and Msg is Forwarded
- is ignored.
-
- The "END", "AND, and "OR" gadgets are used to indicate that this is the
- last comparison argument (END), or that there is another comparison
- argument following this with either an AND or OR relationship.
-
- Some examples of specific types of filtering parameters are given below.
-
- The list view in the lower half of the window lists the comparison arguments.
- Each comparison arguement is listed on two lines. The first line shows
- the header to be checked and the comparison criteria in the following
- format:
-
- FOR header-name comparison-criteria (ignoring case)
-
- (ignoring case) will not be present if "Ignore Case" is not checked.
-
- The second line will show the search argument surrounded by quote (")
- marks. It will be followed by AND or OR if either of these were
- specified. If "Ignore Case" was checked, the Search argument will be in
- all lower case characters no matter how it was entered in the Search:
- string gadget.
-
- To add a selection criteria to the list, enter the appropriate items in
- the gadgets at the top of the window and click on the [ Add ] gadget at
- the bottom of the window. That item will be transfered to the listview at
- the end of the current list of items.
-
- To modify or delete an item, click on the item in the listview. Clicking
- on either the first or second line of any item in the list is acceptable.
- The information from the listview will be transferred to the gadgets at
- the top of the window. Then make the modifications you want (for modify)
- and click on either the [Modify] or [Delete] gadgets at the bottom of the
- window.
-
- To insert an item into the list, enter the data in the gadgets at the top
- of the window as you did to add an item. This time click on the [Insert]
- gadget. The words "Click on item you want to insert IN FRONT OF!" will
- appear in yellow at the top of the listview. Now, as instructed, click on
- the item you want the selection criteria to be inserted in front of. This
- allows you to insert at the head of the list by clicking on the first item
- in the list. Clicking on either the first or second line of any item in
- the list is acceptable.
-
- All of the selection criteria except for the last item must have an AND or
- OR relationship to the criteria following. You can have relationships as
- follows:
-
- a OR b OR c
-
- indicating that if any of the conditions (a, b, or c) are met that message
- will be selected for that particular folder, or
-
- a AND b AND c
-
- indicating that all of the conditions must be met for that message to be
- selected.
-
- Be careful of mixing AND and OR conditions.
-
- a OR b AND c
-
- will work but
-
- b AND c OR a
-
- will not work correctly.
-
- Conditions are checked serially.
-
- In the first example above, if condition a is not met, then b will be
- checked. If b is not met no selection is made; however, if condition c is
- also met, the message will be selected. If condition a is met the
- message will be selected and the b or c conditions are not checked.
-
- In the second example, if condition b is not met, no further check will be
- made so that even if a is met, the message will not be selected. In this
- example condition a will never be checked.
-
- Advanced selection is designed to get around this problem. HOWEVER, THIS
- ADVANCED SELECTION HAS NOT BEEN IMPLIMENTED AS YET! AND WHEN IT IS
- IMPLIMENTED, IT WILL ONLY BE AVAILABLE TO REGISTERED USERS.
-
- With advanced selection you will be able to group items in this manner:
-
- (a AND b) OR (c AND d)
-
- conditions a and b are a group and conditions c and d are a group. The
- checkmarked items "Start Group" and "End Group" are used to specify the
- first item in a group and the last item in a group. You will also be able
- to embed groups within groups such as
-
- (a AND b AND (c OR d))
-
- and use a not condition for a group such as
-
- (a AND b AND NOT (c OR d))
-
- or simply
-
- NOT (a OR b)
-
- Filtering Restrictions. Currently the following restriction is placed on
- filtering. This restriction will be lifted in a later release of AEMail.
-
- Advanced selection (grouping selection criteria as described above), can
- not be done.
-
- Other selection criteria (such as size of message) may be added later.
-
- Examples of using Message Filtering
- ===================================
-
- How would you use message filtering? Here is a practical example of how I
- use it. As you all know, when you implement a new version of AEMail and
- send your first message a special notification message is sent to me
- indicating the version you are using. This notification message is stored
- in a special folder for notification messages that I have received. All
- of the notification messages indicate what they are in the Subject:
- header. However, over the development of AEMail, the format of this
- subject header has changed. Before version 1.10 the Subject header looked
- like this:
-
- Subject: Registration of AEMAIL (Amiga EMAIL), Version x.xx
-
- From version 1.10 through version 1.15, the Subject header looked like
- this:
-
- Subject: AEMAIL Version x.xx Registration
-
- After version 1.15 the Subject header looked like this:
-
- Subject: AEMAIL Version x.xx Notification
-
- Since I am still receiving notification messages back to version 1.03, I
- wanted all such notification messages to go into the same folder. The
- selection criteria for this folder was set to the following:
-
- For Subject: Contains (ignoring case)
- "aemail version ???? registration" OR
-
- For Subject: Contains (ignoring case)
- "aemail version ?* notification" OR
-
- For Subject: Contains (ignoring case)
- "registration of aemail (amiga email), version"
-
- Notice how I handled the variable of the version number in each case. In
- the first criteria I used a fixed replacement wild card (????) to specify
- the version number. In the second criteria I used a variable replacement
- wild card (?*) and in the third criteria I did not use any wild card for
- the version number replacement. That is because the version number occurs
- at the end of the line.
-
- Another use of filtering can be used if you are subscribed to a listserve.
- The example I will show you is for the Miami list serve. Miami actually
- has two listserves: "miami-talk-ml@nordicglobal.com" and
- "miami-announce-ml@nordicglobal.com". The To: address usually reflects
- which listserve the message is coming from but the Reply-To: address
- always reflects "miami-talk-ml@nordicglobal.com".
-
- If you want the folder to include all messages from both listserves you
- can set the following criteria for the that folder:
-
- For Reply-To: Contains (ignoring case)
- "miami-talk-ml@nordicglobal.com"
-
- If you set up two folders, one for the "talk" message list and the other
- for the "announcement" message list you could set the "talk" folder to
- reflect the following criteria:
-
- For To: Contains (ignoring case)
- "miami-talk-ml@nordicglobal.com"
-
- and the "announcement" folder as follows:
-
- For To: Contains (ignoring case)
- "miami-announce-ml@nordicglobal.com"
-
- If messages meet the selection criteria for two different folders, the
- first folder in the folder list which meets the criteria will be selected.
- So, if you were to have two folders set up as described above (one for
- "talk" messages and one for "announcement" messages) and you used the
- Reply-To: address instead of the To: address as the selection criteria for
- the "talk" folder and if the "talk" folder was first, all of the
- "announcement" messages would go in the "talk" folder. However, if the
- "announcement" folder was first, then the messages would be distributed to
- the correct folders.
-
- You will find that the clipboard capability is very helpful in setting up
- your filtering conditions. If there is a particular header that you want
- selected, display the message that has that header, and then double click
- on the header in the message. Edit out the header designator (To:, From:,
- Subject:, etc) and save it to the clipboard. You can save various items
- changing the clipboard unit for each item. Then when you are in the
- Folder Configuration screen, select the Search string gadget and use Right
- Amiga U to call up the clipboard list. Then double click on the item you
- want to select on. It will then be automatically pasted into the Search
- string gadget.
-
- As was stated in the earlier description of the Filter Selection Window,
- the window for the INBOX is used to EXCLUDE messages meeting the INBOX
- criteria from entering your system. Use this with CARE! If you exclude a
- message and you are deleting messages from you POP server, YOU WILL NEVER
- SEE THAT MESSAGE!
-
-
- Set Sort Keys Window
- --------------------
-
- The Set Sort Keys window will be displayed over the entire screen below
- the top title line when either the "Set Sort Key..." menu item from the
- Folders menu is selected or the [Sort Keys] button is clicked in the
- Folder Configuration window.
-
- The Set Sort Keys window looks like the following:
-
- =====================================================================
-
- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
- Priorities: ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
-
- Un-Read Messages: FIRST [ ] Messages with Attachments: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|0| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Replied Messages: FIRST [ ] Forwarded Messages: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|0| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Latest Date: FIRST [ ] Largest Messages: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|0| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Group by FROM at Priority [@|0| Group by Subject at Priority [@|0|
-
- [ ] Order Received
- --> at Priority [@|0| [ ] Apply to all Folders
- [ ] Latest Received
-
- [LAST SAVED] [LAST USED] [ USE ] [ SAVE ] [ CANCEL ]
-
- =====================================================================
-
- Messages in each of the folders can be displayed in various sort orders
- and each folder can have a different sort order. Up to seven levels of
- sort priority can be given. The various sorting criteria are shown on
- this window and a particular sort order can be given for any sort
- priority. The sorting criteria for any particular priority is selected by
- the priority cycle gadget under or opposite each criteria. A priority of
- 0 is used to indicate that this criteria is not used in the sort.
-
- To help visualize which criteria applies to which priority a list at the
- top of the window shows the current position of any particular sort
- criteria in the priority list. With the exception of priority 0 (no
- priority), no two criteria can have the same priority. If this happens,
- **DUP** will appear for that priority in the priority list.
-
- If you want the sorting criteria to be used for all folders check the
- "Apply to all Folders" box.
-
- At the bottom of the window is the [LAST SAVED], [LAST USED], [USE],
- [SAVE], and [CANCEL] buttons. If you want the sorting to apply only to
- this AEMail session only select [USE]. If you want to make the sorting
- permanent, select [SAVE]. [CANCEL], of course, will abort the operation
- without setting any sort keys. The [LAST SAVED] button is used to restore
- the sort keys to those last saved and the [LAST USED] is used to restore
- the last used sort keys.
-
- If the this window was called from the Folder Configuration Window,
- selecting [USE], [SAVE], or [CANCEL] will return you to the Folder
- Configuration Window.
-
- The [LAST SAVED] and [LAST USED] buttons will simply restore the
- appropriate sorting order and will not terminate the Folder Configuration
- Window. You will have to use the [USE], [SAVE], or [CANCEL] buttons to do
- that.
-
- Examples of Setting Sort Keys
- =============================
-
- You may want your messages displayed in different orders in the Message
- List Window. This is the purpose of the "Set Sort Keys Window."
-
- Let's assume that you want your messages displayed with unread messages
- first. Within both the unread and previously read sections you want the
- messages sorted by the latest date first. To do this click on the Un-Read
- Messages: FIRST box and set the priority underneath Un-Read Messages to
- 1. Then click on the Latest Date: FIRST box and set it's Priority to 2.
- Notice that as you change the Priority cycle gadget for Latest Date from 0
- to 1 to 2, you will see *DUP* appear in priority 1 as the Date moves
- through the priority 1 position.
-
- The final sort window for the above sorting priority will look like this:
-
- =====================================================================
-
- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
- Priorities: UNREAD DATE ------- ------- ------- ------- -------
-
- Un-Read Messages: FIRST [X] Messages with Attachments: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|1| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Replied Messages: FIRST [ ] Forwarded Messages: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|0| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Latest Date: FIRST [X] Largest Messages: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|2| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Group by FROM at Priority [@|0| Group by Subject at Priority [@|0|
-
- [ ] Order Received
- --> at Priority [@|0| [ ] Apply to all Folders
- [ ] Latest Received
-
- [LAST SAVED] [LAST USED] [ USE ] [ SAVE ] [ CANCEL ]
-
- =====================================================================
-
- When you are satisfied with the order click on [SAVE] to save this order
- for this folder only. If you want to use this order for all your folders
- click on "Apply to all Folders" before clicking on [SAVE].
-
-
- Another example might have the messages displayed with unread messages
- first, followed by messages grouped by SUBJECT, and within the SUBJECT
- grouping, by the latest date received. This, in effect, creates a message
- threading condition with like subjects grouped together.
-
- To create this sort condition, click on the Un-Read Messages: FIRST box
- and set it's priority to 1. Then set the "Group by Subject at Priority"
- cycle gadget to 2. Finally click on the Latest Date: FIRST box and set
- it's priority to 3. The final sort window for this grouping would be:
-
- =====================================================================
-
- 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
- Priorities: UNREAD SUBJECT DATE ------- ------- ------- -------
-
- Un-Read Messages: FIRST [X] Messages with Attachments: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|1| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Replied Messages: FIRST [ ] Forwarded Messages: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|0| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Latest Date: FIRST [X] Largest Messages: FIRST [ ]
- Priority [@|3| LAST [ ] Priority [@|0| LAST [ ]
-
- Group by FROM at Priority [@|0| Group by Subject at Priority [@|2|
-
- [ ] Order Received
- --> at Priority [@|0| [ ] Apply to all Folders
- [ ] Latest Received
-
- [LAST SAVED] [LAST USED] [ USE ] [ SAVE ] [ CANCEL ]
-
- =====================================================================
-
- If you want the messages sorted with the earlier messages first within the
- subject grouping, you would click on Latest Date: LAST rather than Latest
- Date: FIRST.
-
- Since the date sort is controlled by the local date and time that the
- message was SENT, you might want to use the Order Received or Latest
- Received instead of Latest Date. Order Received will list the messages
- with the oldest received first, while Latest Received will list the
- messages with the newest received first.
-
- You, of course, can set different sort orders for different folders. In
- this case select the folder you want to change the sort order on and DON'T
- click on the "Apply to all Folders" checkmark gadget.
-
-
- Address Book Window
- -------------------
-
- The Address Book window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
- screen whenever you double click on the ADDRESS BOOK command icon or on
- the [Call Address Book] button in the COMPOSE MESSAGE window (see below
- under the COMPOSE MESSAGE window description).
-
- If you have a non-interlaced screen (640 x 200), the display will cover
- the folder strip to allow more room for the Address Book display. With an
- interlaced screen (640 x 400) you will be able to see the folder strip.
-
- The Address Book window looks like the following:
-
- =====================================================================
- Address Book
- =====================================================================
-
- Nick Name: [ ] Address: [ ] Select [@| To: |
-
- Real Name: [ ] Group [ ] Send Header Only [ ]
-
- Nickname Real Name UserID (Address) [x] Expand
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH n ENTRIES | |
- xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- [ ADD ] [MODIFY] [DELETE] [SELECT] [ EXIT ]
-
- =====================================================================
-
- This window can be used to create, modify, or delete Address Book entries.
- It can also be used to select a Nickname to be used as a recipient of a
- message when composing messages.
-
- Several of the Command icons remain active when you are displaying the
- Address Book window, although there meaning maybe slightly changed. These
- are the DISPLAY NEXT MESSAGE icon, the DISPLAY PREVIOUS MESSAGE icon, the
- DISPLAY NEXT FOLDER icon, the DISPLAY PREVIOUS FOLDER icon, the DISPLAY
- CURRENT FOLDER icon, the PRINT icon, the DELETE icon, and the COMPOSE
- MESSAGE icon.
-
- The three fields of an address book entry are: a one to eight character
- Nickname, an individual's real name (up to 99 characters), and the address
- of the individual (UserId and Domain in the form userid@domain) which is
- limited to 70 characters.
-
- Group lists can also be created which distributes a message to a number of
- different individuals. The group is identified with the heading
- "DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH nnn ENTRIES" in the top most UserID field. The
- nnn indicates the number of entries in the group. The UserID's for the
- members of that list are shown in alphabetic order below that heading. For
- items in the distribution list, real UserIDs or Nicknames can be used. An
- item in the distribution list can even be another distribution list
- identified by the Nickname for that group. By clicking on the Checkmarked
- item "Group", you can identify the entry as a group item.
-
- The checkmarked item identified as "Send Header Only" is only active when
- "Group" is checked. If a checkmark is in the "Send Header Only" box, only
- the group name will be sent in the To: field when a message is sent to
- the group; otherwise, every UserId in the group will be listed in the To:
- header. It is a good idea to check this item if you have large groups or
- if you don't want the other members of the group to know all the members
- of the group.
-
- If a Nickname rather than a UserID is used in the group list Address
- field, then, if a modification is made to the UserID of the Nickname, you
- do not have to change the item in the Group list. The modification will
- be automatic when the group rather than the individual is selected.
-
- When composing a message, a Nickname can be used to identify the recipient
- of a message. All Nicknames are expanded to Real Name and UserID when
- mail is sent.
-
- For registered users of AEMail, the checkmarked box to the far right of
- the list heading labeled "Expand" is used to shrink or expand the group
- entries in the list. When this box is not checked, only the group heading
- is displayed without the entries in the group showing. When it is
- checked, the groups are expanded to show all the members of the group.
- When first displayed, this item will be checked. However, the system
- remembers the state of this checkmark so if you should shrink the groups,
- the next time you select the Address Book only the group headings will be
- displayed.
-
- For un-registered users, this item will be checked and ghosted. You will
- not be able to shrink the groups.
-
- Address Book entries are sorted by Nickname and group entries are
- interspersed with single entries. Also Real Names are presented as first
- name followed by last name rather than last name, first name.
-
- This is a scrolling list. If there are too many entries to fit in the
- window, you can scroll the list by using the scroll bar, clicking on the
- up or down arrows below the scroll bar, or by using the up or down cursor
- keys.
-
- Additionally the following keys can be used to move the list as follows:
-
- "Home" or "Cursor Left" moves the listview to the top.
- "End" or "Cursor Right" moves the listview to the botton.
- "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up. The
- top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
- line of the new page.
- "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
- The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
- top line of the new page.
- The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
- the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
- feature.
-
- WARNING: if you have selected one of the string gadgets for entering
- data, the keys listed above will not work for scrolling the list. You
- will have to click outside of the string gadget to re-activate scrolling
- with the cursor keys.
-
- For adding entries to the Address Book, the entries at the top of the
- window are used to place data in the various fields of the Address Book
- entry. If a message was selected when the address book was called, the
- Real Name:, if present, and Address: fields are filled in with
- information from the Reply-To: header of the message. If the Reply-To:
- header is not present, the From: header will be used. You can force the
- From: header to be used by holding down the shift key when you click on
- the Address Book icon.
-
- Please keep in mind that Reply-To: addresses normally do not have real
- names associated with them, but From: addresses many times do. If you
- want the real name you may have to hold down the shift key when you click
- on the Address Book icon.
-
- If you access the Address Book from the Compose message window during a
- "mailto:" call to AEMail, the userid from the "mailto:" will be placed in
- the address field. This allows you to assign a Nickname and Real Name to
- this address and save it in your Address Book.
-
- If you click on one of the entries in the list view, that entry will be
- transferred to the Nickname:, Real Name:, and Address: fields at the top
- of the window. If you click on a group entry line which has the Group
- Nickname and "DISTRIBUTION LIST ..." in the address portion, only the
- Nickname: and the Group name (in the Real Name field) will be transferred
- leaving any previous address in the Address field. The "Group" box will
- also be checked. This facilitates adding items to a Group list.
-
- When adding an entry to the address book, you must always enter a Nickname
- and Address. Real Name is optional, but recommended.
-
- To add a group entry, the "Group" box must be checked. Groups need a
- Nickname that is unique (not the same as that used for an individual) and
- should have a group description entered in the Real Name: string gadget.
- Group entries are entered one at a time. The maximum number of entries
- that can be added to a group is 3000. When a message is sent to a group,
- the message will be sent to a maximum of 50 recipients at a time. This
- takes care of problems when there is a limit on the number of recipient
- addresses that a SMTP server can handle at a time.
-
- After correctly filling in the top portion of the window, click on the
- [ADD] button to add the item to the list. Except for group Nicknames,
- there can't be a duplicate Nickname when adding to the list. An already
- existing group Nickname will cause the entry to be added to that groups
- distribution list.
-
- To modify an entry, the Nickname for the entry must already exist in the
- list. You can not modify Nicknames. If you need to do this, delete the
- old entry and add a new one. For individual entries, you can modify
- either the Real Name: or Address: fields. For group entries you can
- only modify the Real Name: field. If you need to modify an address in
- the distribution list, delete the old one and add a new one.
-
- One of the reasons that Nicknames are preferred in distribution lists is
- that, if you need to modify a user's address, you can do so by simply
- modifying the Individual's entry. The address in the group is then
- automatically updated by reference.
-
- Selecting one of the entries in the address list will move the data from
- that entry to the fields at the top of the window. Make the modifications
- you want then click on the [MODIFY] button to make the modifications.
-
- To delete an entry, select it in the list and then click on the [DELETE]
- button. You can also use the DELETE icon to do this.
-
- The [SELECT] button is used only for one special purpose. If the full
- Address Book was called from a "mailto:" call to AEMail, this button is
- used to select an address from the Address Book and place it in the
- appropriate recipients address line while composing the message. The
- Address Book display is slightly different if it was not a "mailto:" call
- (see below).
-
- When you click on the [SELECT] button, the Address Book display is closed
- and the COMPOSE MESSAGE window is re-activated. To determine which header
- field is to receive the address, the "Select" cycle gadget at the top of
- the window is used. There are three items for this gadget: To:, cc:, and
- bcc:. Determine which field should receive the address and then click on
- the [SELECT] button. The Nickname for the selected item is transferred to
- the appropriate field in the compose window.
-
- If the Address Book was not called from the Compose window, the "Select"
- cycle gadget will be ghosted and can not be used. If the Address Book was
- called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window, clicking on one of the address
- fields before calling the Address Book will automatically select the
- appropriate field in the "Select" cycle gadget.
-
- You can avoid using the [SELECT] button for returning to the COMPOSE
- MESSAGE Window by double clicking on an item in the Address Book list
- view.
-
- If the Address Book was not called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window,
- instead of double clicking, the COMPOSE MESSAGE command icon can be
- selected when in the Address Book window. When this is done, the COMPOSE
- MESSAGE window is activated for composing a new message with the selected
- address field always being the To: field. The selected address in the
- Address Book will be moved to the To: field.
-
- The [EXIT] button is used to exit from the Address Book window without
- performing any address selection for a composed message. You will need to
- [EXIT] from the Address Book if you want to quit AEMail.
-
- If the Address Book was called while displaying a message, clicking on the
- DISPLAY NEXT MESSAGE or the DISPLAY PREVIOUS MESSAGE icons will
- automatically exit from the Address Book and display either the next or
- previous message in the currently displayed message list.
-
- If you click on the DISPLAY NEXT FOLDER, the DISPLAY PREVIOUS FOLDER, or
- DISPLAY CURRENT FOLDER icons, the Address Book will be closed and the
- appropriate message list for the selected folder will be displayed.
-
- If the PRINT icon is selected while you are displaying the Address Book,
- you will get a printout of your complete address book. All individual
- entries will be displayed first followed by group entries. Unless a group
- is too large to fit on one page, an attempt will be made to ensure that a
- group will be printed in it's entirety on a page.
-
- When the Address Book is be called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window and the
- COMPOSE MESSAGE window was not activated during a "mailto:" call to
- AEMail, the Address Book display will be slightly different. It will look
- like this:
-
- =====================================================================
- |+| Address Book For Compose
- =====================================================================
-
- Nickname Real Name UserID (Address) [ ] Expand
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH n ENTRIES | |
- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx DISTRIBUTION LIST WITH n ENTRIES | |
- xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx| |
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Click on Address Book entry to transfer to [@| To: | field [ CLOSE ]
-
- =====================================================================
-
- This is an abreviated window which does not have the string gadgets for
- creating or deleting Address Book entries. It is designed for selecting
- addresses to transfer to the COMPOSE MESSAGE window only. When you click
- on an address in the window it will be transferred to the appropriate
- field in the COMPOSE MESSAGE window as determined by the cycle gadget at
- the bottom of the window. There are three items for this gadget: To:,
- cc:, and bcc: (the same as the "Select" cycle gadget in the full Address
- Book window. Select which field should receive the address and click on
- the address in the Address Book. You can select multiple addresses; the
- window will not close until you click on either the Close gadget at the
- top of the Address Book window or the [CLOSE] button at the bottom of the
- window. The Address Book window will also close if you double click on a
- name (It will be transferred and then the window will close).
-
- You can also select which field you want to receive the address by
- clicking into the appropriate field in the COMPOSE MESSAGE window. You
- will see the cycle gadget switch to that field and the cursor will
- disappear from the field since the Address Book window will again become
- activated.
-
- When the Address Book is called from the COMPOSE MESSAGE window it will be
- in the un-expanded state. If you are a registered user, you can expand
- the group names by clicking on the "Expand" checkmark gadget to the right
- of the listview headings.
-
- You can also have the full Address Book display called from the COMPOSE
- MESSAGE window by holding down the shift key when you click on the [Call
- Address Book] gadget.
-
- NOTE: When AEMail is loaded it will automatically create an address book
- entry for the Nickname AEMail with an address for my email address:
- jzachar@calweb.com. You can use this entry whenever you wish to report a
- bug or send a message concerning AEMail to me.
-
-
- Message Display Window
- ----------------------
-
- The Message Display window will be displayed in the lower portion of the
- screen whenever you double click on a message in the message list window.
- If you are already displaying a message, clicking on the NEXT or PREVIOUS
- command icons will display either the NEXT or PREVIOUS message.
-
- If you have a non-interlaced screen (640 x 200), the display will cover
- the folder strip to allow more room for the message display. With an
- interlaced screen (640 x 400) you will be able to see and use the folder
- strip.
-
- To re-display the Message List, click on the "folder" icon on the Command
- Icon Tool Bar or one of the folders in the folder icon bar (if visable).
-
- The message is divided into two sections: message header information,
- which is always present, and a scrolling list that displays the message.
- Header information will also be displayed in the scrolling message
- listview, but only those header lines that you want displayed.
-
- The message header portion of the screen is set up as follows:
-
- From: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Date: DOW, MMM DD YYYY HH:MM:SS
- To: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx [ATTACHMENT]
- Subject: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
-
-
- The From: and To: fields will show the Real Name (if present) from the
- appropriate header. If the Real Name is not present in the header, then
- the UserID will be used instead. If a Nickname is being used for a
- message being sent, then the Nickname will appear.
-
- The Subject field will have the RE; or (FWD) preappended to the field for
- messages that are REPLIES and/or are FORWARDED.
-
- If the message has attachments, either MIME or UUENCODED, the [ATTACHMENT]
- button will appear at the right of the To: line. If no attachments are
- present this button will say [SAVE TEXT] instead. Clicking on the [SAVE
- TEXT] button will bring up the save text requester along side the [SAVE
- TEXT] button which is described below under "Save Text Requester".
-
- The complete message will be displayed in the message listview including
- any text type attachments. If the attachments are UUENCODED attachments
- or are non-text type attachments, they will not be shown, but can be
- retrieved by clicking on the [ATTACHMENT] button. This will bring up an
- attachment requestor which is described below under "Attachment
- Requester".
-
- Messages that are encoded with "Quoted-Printable" notation as well as text
- messages encoded with encoded binary (BASE64) will be correctly displayed
- as well. Since these types of messages will be saved with their encoding
- intact when saved using the SAVE MESSAGE icon or the "Export..." item
- under the Messages menu, the [SAVE TEXT] gadget has been provided to save
- message text correctly decoded for messages without attachments. For
- messages with attachments, the first entry in the Attachment list is the
- body of messages itself.
-
- The message display is a scrolling list. There are four methods that you
- can use to scroll the message:
-
- (1) Use the scroll bar to the right of the message.
-
- (2) Use the scroll arrows at the bottom of the scroll bar.
-
- (3) Use the up and down cursor keys. You can also move the listview
- with other keys as follows:
-
- "Home" or "Cursor Left" moves the listview to the top.
- "End" or "Cursor Right" moves the listview to the botton.
- "PgUp" or "Shift Cursor Up" pages the listview one "page" up. The
- top line of the previous page will be displayed as the bottom
- line of the new page.
- "PgDn" or "Shift Cursor Down" pages the list view one "page" down.
- The bottom line of the previous page will be displayed as the
- top line of the new page.
- The cursor up/down keys on the keypad will have the same action as
- the normal cursor keys with the exception of the shift
- feature.
-
- (4) click the mouse on the list display and while holding down
- the left mouse button, move above or below the display.
- When you lift up on the mouse button after the list
- starts to scroll, you can continue to scroll by moving
- the mouse up or down. Clicking into the display will
- stop the scrolling action.
-
- While messages are loaded into the listview, you will not see them until
- they are completely read. A busy pointer will be displayed until the
- listview is completely built.
-
- For un-registered users, the message display will be quite slow to load
- although you will be able to see the message as it is being loaded into
- the display. If you want a faster display load, register AEMail!
- ================
-
- You can also edit and save lines from the message to the clipboard by
- double clicking on any line in the message. This will open a window at
- the top of the screen for editing and saving the line to the clipboard.
- See the section "Using the Clipboard with AEMail" under V. USING AEMAIL.
-
- Save Text Requester
- ===================
-
- When you click on the [SAVE TEXT] button on the Message Display Window, a
- a tiered set of five buttons will appear to the left of the [SAVE TEXT]
- gadget that look like this:
-
- [ VIEW ]
- [ SAVE FILE ]
- [ SAVE CLIP ][SAVE TEXT]
- [ CLIP UNIT ]
- [ CANCEL ]
-
-
- Clicking on one of the buttons will perform the appropriate action as
- described below. With the exception of [CLIP UNIT], the buttons will
- disappear at the completion of the action.
-
- [VIEW]
-
- This will display the message text with the program you selected
- in the "mailcap" file for the "text" MIME type. If a program was
- not pre-defined for this MIME type, this button will be disabled
- (ghosted). This option is given so that you can select special
- message display programs to display the message and perhaps
- perform special operations of the message. As an example, you
- could specify an editor which would allow you to make
- modifications to the message and then save portions of it to a
- file or clipboard.
-
- [SAVE FILE]
-
- A file requester will pop up which allows you to select
- a file to save your message to. If the message used a coding
- scheme such as quoted-printable or encoded binary it will be
- properly converted before it is saved. The default directory
- designated to receive this text file is RAM:; however, you can
- change this with the file requester or set a different
- default with the Default Path Parameters display on the
- Configuration screen.
-
- [SAVE CLIP]
-
- If the text has an encoding type of 7-bit, 8-bit, or
- quoted-printable, you can save it to the current clipboard unit.
- If the text is encoded binary, this button will be ghosted.
-
- [CLIP UNIT]
-
- This will bring up the requester that allows you to change the
- current clipboard unit (see "Using the Clipboard with AEMail"
- under V. USING AEMAIL).
-
- [CANCEL]
-
- This gadget is provided to exit from the request without
- performing any action.
-
- Attachment Requester
- ====================
-
- When you click on the [ATTACHMENTS] button on the Message Display Window,
- an Attachment Requester will be displayed. It looks like this:
-
- |============================================================|
- |o| Attachment List |
- |============================================================|
- | MimeType/SubType File Name |
- | ========================================================== |
- | | 1 SHOWN text/plain | | |
- | | Description: (None) | | |
- | | 2 VIEWABLE image/gif castle.gif | | |
- | | Description: Picture of a castle | | |
- | | 3 SAVE ONLY application/octet-stream aemail.lha | | |
- | | Description: The AEMail archive | | |
- | ========================================================== |
- | |
- | [ VIEW ] [VIEW & SAVE] [ SAVE FILE ] |
- | |
- | [ SAVE CLIP ] [ CLIP UNIT ] [ EXIT ] |
- |____________________________________________________________|
-
- This requester is initially placed at the top center of the window
- partially obscuring the command and folder icons and the top portion of
- the message. You can drag the requester around the window to expose other
- items of the display. You can also use the scroll bar on the message
- display listview to show different parts of the message; however, none of
- the commands on the command or folder bar or the menu bar can be activated
- until after you click on the [EXIT] button in the Attachment Requester.
-
- The SHOWN designation is used for any attachment that is displayed in the
- message window. This is generally any attachment that has a MIME type of
- text or message. However, standard Mailcap entries have been included in
- the Mailcap file to also display and save these attachments from the
- Attachment window.
-
- Any message with attachments will generally have one section (the initial
- message) which is displayable text and will be shown as an attachment with
- the SHOWN designation. You will also be able to VIEW all SHOWN parts of
- the message separably. You will always be able to save any item in the
- list in it's un-encoded form.
-
- UUENCODED attachments will have the designation UUENCODED displayed in the
- MIME types/subtypes field.
-
- Any attachments that do not have a MIME type of text or message will have
- either a VIEWABLE or SAVE ONLY designation. The VIEWABLE designation is
- used for those MIME types/subtypes which have a program designated in the
- mailcap file for displaying this MIME type/subtype. If no program is
- designated for this MIME type/subtype the SAVE ONLY designator will appear
- on the attachment line and the [VIEW] and the [VIEW & SAVE] buttons will
- be disabled.
-
- UUENCODED attachments are always SAVE ONLY attachments.
-
- To select an attachment to view, view & save, or to save only, select the
- appropriate attachment line in the list view gadget. You can select the
- main description line (with number, mime type, and filename) or the second
- line with the "Description:" heading.
-
- After selecting the attachment, the buttons below the listview will
- perform the following actions:
-
- [VIEW]
-
- This will display the attachment with the program you
- selected in the "mailcap" file for this MIME type/subtype.
- If a program was not pre-defined for this MIME type/subtype
- this button will be disabled and you will not be able to
- display the attachment. You will also see SAVE ONLY rather
- than VIEWABLE on the description of this attachment.
-
- [VIEW & SAVE]
-
- A file requester will pop up which allows you to select
- a file to save your attachment to. The default directory
- designated to receive attachments is RAM:; however, you can
- change this with the file requester or set a different
- default with the Default Path Parameters display on the
- Configuration screen.
-
- If a file name was provided in either the Content-Type: or
- Content-Disposition: headers, the file name will be shown
- on the attachment description and will be pre-set as the
- filename in the file requester. You can, of course, change
- this name if you wish.
-
- After the file is saved, the attachment will be displayed
- with the program you selected in the "mailcap" file.
-
- If a program was not pre-defined for this MIME type/subtype
- this button will be disabled and you will not be able to
- display the attachment. You will also see SAVE ONLY rather
- than VIEWABLE on the description of this attachment.
-
-
- [SAVE FILE]
-
- A file requester will pop up which allows you to select
- a file to save your attachment to. The default directory
- designated to receive attachments is RAM:; however, you can
- change this with the file requester or set a different
- default with the Default Path Parameters display on the
- Configuration screen.
-
- If a file name was provided in either the Content-Type: or
- Content-Disposition: headers or with the UUENCODED "begin"
- line, the file name will be shown on the attachment
- description and will be pre-set as the default filename
- in the file requester. You can, of course, change this
- name if you wish.
-
- You will always be able to save any attachment even if it
- is SHOWN and a filename is not specified.
-
- [SAVE CLIP]
-
- If the attachment has an encoding type of 7-bit, 8-bit, or
- quoted-printable, you can save the attachment to the current
- clipboard unit. If the attachment is not a text type attachment
- (encoded binary), this button will be ghosted.
-
- [CLIP UNIT]
-
- This will bring up the requester that allows you to change the
- current clipboard unit (see "Using the Clipboard with AEMail"
- under V. USING AEMAIL).
-
- [EXIT]
-
- After performing all the operations you wish for any
- particular attachment, click on this button to remove
- the Attachment Requester. This requester also has a
- CLOSE gadget which you can also use to exit from the
- requester.
-
-
- Compose Message Window
- ----------------------
-
- The Compose Message window is brought up whenever you click on the COMPOSE
- MESSAGE command icon or select the Compose..., Reply..., or Forward...
- sub-menus under the Messages menu. If a message is selected when you
- click on the COMPOSE MESSAGE command icon it will act as a "Reply to this
- message" action.
-
- The Compose Message window will cover the entire screen. You must proceed
- sequentional through the actions or cancel to abort the compose operation.
-
- The Compose Message window looks like this:
-
- =====================================================================
- Compose a Message (Signature: [full path of signature file active])
- =====================================================================
-
- To: [ ][CLR] [Call Address Book ]
-
- cc: [ ][CLR]
-
- bcc: [ ][CLR]
-
- Reply To: [ ][CLR] [ Use Default ]
-
- Subject: [ ][CLR]
-
- [] New Message [] 7-Bit
- [] Reply to Message [] 8-bit
- [] Forward Message [] quoted-printable
- [] encoded binary
-
- [ ] Quote Original Message Text Quote Prefix[> ]
-
- Quote Header: [ ]
-
- [ ] Add Signature Block [Select Signature] [ Edit Signature]
-
- [Compose/Edit Message] [ Add Headers ] [Add Attachments]
-
- [Send Message Now] [Queue Message] [Save In Pending] [Cancel Message]
-
- ======================================================================
-
- The title bar on the Compose Message window will contain the full path
- name to the current, in use signature file.
-
- When the Compose Message window first appears and if the message is a
- replied message, the following requester will appear if the replied
- message had To: recipients other than yourself:
-
-
- |=========================================================|
- | Multiple Recipients |
- |---------------------------------------------------------|
- | The message you are replying to |
- | has other To: recipients. |
- | Do you want to send the reply |
- | |
- | [o] to only the sender of the original message? |
- | [ ] to all To: recipients of the original message? |
- | [ ] cc: to all To: recipients of the original message? |
- | [ ] bcc: to all To: recipients of the original message? |
- | |
- | [ Continue ] |
- | |
- |=========================================================|
-
- With this requester you can send the message you are composing to none of
- the other recipients, directly to all the other recipients (in the To:
- line), as a cc to all the recipients, or as a bcc to all the other
- recipients.
-
- If there is a single recipient to the message and that recipient is the
- same as either your From: or Reply-To: address, you will not see the
- requester. Also, when the list of recipients is transferred to the
- appropriate address line in the Compose window, any address that is the
- same as your From: or Reply-To: address will be stripped. If you want
- to send the message also to the From: or Reply-To: address you will have
- to add the address yourself.
-
- When you have selected the action you want, hit [Continue] and the list of
- To: recipients will be transferred to the appropriate string gadget in
- the Compose Message window.
-
- SPECIAL CONSIDERATION: If the message you are replying to was received by
- a version of AEMail prior to 1.42, you will not be able to transfer
- recipients that extend beyond one line. You can solve this problem,
- however, by saving the message you want to reply to to a file (using the
- export function) and then reading it back into version 1.43 of AEMail.
- To read it back in using the "From Local File.." menu item under the
- "Retrieve Msgs" menu.
-
- One point of warning. If the recipient of the original message was the
- name of a list rather than the name of an individual, you will also see
- this requester. Unfortunately, there is no way to know that the recipient
- name is a list name rather than an individual name. In this event, you
- should always select "to only the sender of the original message" since
- the list name is probably not a valid recipient.
-
- If there were cc:'s to the original message, you may also see the
- following similar requester for sending to the cc: recipients:
-
- |=========================================================|
- | Multiple Recipients |
- |---------------------------------------------------------|
- | The message you are replying to |
- | has one or more cc: recipients. |
- | Do you want to send the reply |
- | |
- | [o] to only the sender of the original message? |
- | [ ] to all cc: recipients of the original message? |
- | [ ] cc: to all cc: recipients of the original message? |
- | [ ] bcc: to all cc: recipients of the original message? |
- | |
- | [ Continue ] |
- | |
- |=========================================================|
-
- Again, after you have selected the action you want, hit [Continue] and the
- list of cc: recipients will be transferred to the appropriate string gadget
- in the Compose Message window.
-
- If the message is a replied message, the To: string gadget will also be
- filled in with the Reply-To: address from the message you are replying to
- or, if that is not present, the From: real name and user ID of the
- message you are replying to. This is in addition to any action caused by
- the previously mentioned requesters.
-
- You can force the From: address to be used by holding down the shift key
- when clicking on the "compose" icon or selecting the menu sub-item "Use
- From..." on the Reply menu item of the Messages menu.
-
- Also, if the message is the result of a "mailto:" call, the To: string
- gadget will be filled in with the userid passed by the "mailto:" call.
-
- If the message is a replied or forwarded message, the Subject: string
- gadget will be automatically filled in with the subject from the replied
- or forwarded message. RE: or (fwd) will also automatically appear in
- front of the subject.
-
- You may enter names, either Nicknames or Real Names and/or UserIDs, for
- any of the To:, cc:, or bcc: fields. If a Real Name and/or UserID is
- entered, it should be entered as
-
- Real Name<userid@domain> or
- userid@domain(Real Name) or
- userid@domain
-
- The domain can be left off if the recipient is at the same domain as the
- user. However, it is best that the full userid@domain be used so there is
- no confusion with Nicknames.
-
- If a Nickname is used it will be automatically expanded when the message
- is sent.
-
- If multiple users are placed in any of the To:, cc:, or bcc: fields they
- must be separated by commas. Each of the string gadgets (To:, cc:, or
- bcc:) can hold a string up to 4096 charcaters long. This allows you to
- build up quite a long list of recipients; however, using a group Nickname
- is preferable since only one name is needed in the string gadget.
-
- If the users you are sending the message to are in your Address Book, you
- can click on the [Call Address Book] button. This will call up an
- abreviated form of your Address Book (see Address Book window discussion
- above) and you can select the user you want. Clicking on the user will
- transfer the Nickname for that user to the appropriate field indicated by
- the cycle gadget at the bottom of the Address Book window (To:, cc: or
- bcc:). The Nickname for the user will be automatically added to the
- appropriate field in the Compose window. If you make a mistake and the
- wrong name is added or it is added to the wrong field, you can use the
- backspace key to remove the offending nickname or the [CLR] gadget to
- completely clear the field.
-
- The Address Book window will remain displayed to allow you to select
- multiple names. Multiple names in any field will be automatically
- separated by commas.
-
- To exit from the Address Book display, either click on the Close gadget at
- the top of the Address Book window or the [CLOSE] button at the bottom of
- the window. Alternately, you can double click on the last name you add to
- a field.
-
- You can also use the [Call Address Book] gadget to place the userid from a
- "mailto:" call into your Address Book. In this case the full address book
- will be shown rather than the abbreviated one. You can also access the
- full Address Book by pressing the shift key when you click on the [Call
- Address Book] gadget (see the discussion of the Address Book window
- above).
-
- All of the gadgets in the Compose Window remain active when you are
- displaying the abbreviated form of the Address Book. They are not active
- when you display the full Address Book. The "select" cycle gadget in the
- Address Book can be used to select the field you want the address
- transferred to, or alternately, you can click into the field you want and
- the cycle gadget will automatically be set to that field. When you do
- this, the Address Book window will immediately become activated to allow
- you to select the address you want or to move the Address Book list view
- with the cursor keys.
-
- The cc: field is used to send a "carbon copy" of the message to the
- people in the list on the cc: line. The cc: header will appear on the
- message sent to the To:, cc: and bcc: recipients. The bcc: field is
- used the send a "blind carbon copy" to the people in that list. The bcc:
- recipients will not be identified to any of the recipients of the message.
-
- The Reply To: field is used to place a Reply-To: address header in the
- message. This field is intended for people who want replies directed to a
- different email address than their From: address. The configuration item
- "Reply-To:" will automatically be loaded into this field when the compose
- window is displayed. If the Reply To: address for this message should be
- different than the configured Reply-To address, then place it here. If
- you click on the [ Use Default ] button, your configured Reply-To address
- will be placed in this field. If the Reply To: field is left blank, no
- Reply-To: header line will be added to the message.
-
- The Subject: field is used to create a subject header for your message.
- If the message is a reply, RE: will be placed in front of the subject.
- If the message is forwarded, (fwd) will be placed after the subject.
-
- The [CLR] gadget to the right of the To:, Reply To:, Subject:, cc:, and
- bcc: string gadgets allows you to easily clear the data in the
- appropriate string gadget.
-
- Below the Subject field is two columns of Radio buttons for selecting the
- type message to create and to specify the encoding method for the message
- body. The first column of radio buttons specifies the message type to
- create. These can be:
-
- Compose a new Message
- Reply to Message
- Forward Message
- Edit Message
-
- Which buttons appear depends on the way the Compose Message window was
- called.
-
- "New Message" and "Edit Message" appear if a message was selected from the
- PENDING or QUEUED folders and the COMPOSE MESSAGE command icon was
- selected or the "Edit..." menu item was selected from the Messages menu.
- The "Edit Message" button is initially highlighted.
-
- "New Message", "Reply to Message", and "Forward Message" appear if a
- message was selected from an input folder (such as INBOX) and the COMPOSE
- MESSAGE command icon was selected or one of the "Reply" or "Forward..."
- menu items were selected from the Messages menu. If a "Reply" sub-menu
- item was selected, the "Reply to Message" button will be initially
- highlighted. If "Forward..." is selected, the "Forward Message" button
- will be intially highlighted.
-
- Only "New Message" appears and is highlighted if no message was selected,
- if the "Compose.." menu item was selected, or if a message in the SENT
- folder was selected.
-
- "New Message" also appears if the Compose message window was activated by
- a "mailto:" call from a browser. If a "message=" argument was provided on
- the shell call to AEMail, both the "New Message" and "Edit Message" will
- appear and the "Edit Message item will be highlighted..
-
- If the "Edit...", "Reply" or "Forward..." menu items are selected and a
- message was not selected, an error message appears. If the "Compose..."
- sub-menu is selected, a new message will always be created. Likewise,
- messages cannot be replied to or forwarded from the PENDING, QUEUED or
- SENT folders. If the "Edit..." menu item is selected, the message must
- come from either the PENDING or QUEUED folder.
-
- You can always change the preferred type of message to one of the other
- ones allowed by clicking on the appropriate message type.
-
- The radio button column on the right of the window is for the encoding
- method for the message body. Four items appear here:
-
- 7-Bit
- 8-Bit
- quoted-printable
- encoded binary
-
- The default is 8-bit. Some Internet gateways, however, can not handle
- 8-bit data - only 7-bit. If this is the case with your situation, select
- 7-bit, or if your message contains characters above ASCII 128 (most
- foriegn character sets have these types of characters), select
- "quoted-printable" or "encoded binary".
-
- The "quoted-printable" encoding is preferred in this instance. You will
- be able to read most of the raw message except for the extended character
- set characters. The "encoded binary" encoding will encode the message in
- BASE64 encoding which is totally un-readable in it's raw format. AEMail,
- however, is able to handle the translation of both "quoted-printable" and
- "encoded binary" in the message body for both sending and receiving
- messages.
-
- If the message is a reply, the "Quote Original Message Text" box will be
- checked if you have selected this option in the General Parameters page of
- the Configuration screen. You can un-check this box if you don't want the
- original text quoted in the message (or check it, if the default action
- was not to include text). For all other types of Compose windows, this
- checkbox will be disabled.
-
- The "Quote Prefix:" string gadget will indicate what is to be placed in
- front of each quoted line. This, by default, is '>'; however, you can add
- whatever you like here (such as the person's initials followed by : or
- >). You can also permanently change this field with the General
- Parameters page of the Configuration screen.
-
- A "Quote header:" will be placed on the line in front of the quoted
- material. Currently, the default header which will appear in the Quote
- Header: string gadget is:
-
- On &(week), &(date2), at &(time), &(name) wrote:
-
- The & followed by a field name in parenthesis indicates substitution of
- data from the original message headers. The values that can be
- substituted are:
-
- &(name) The Real Name of the sender of the original
- message. If the Real Name is not available,
- the sender's UserId will be used instead
-
- &(subject) The subject from the original message. Any RE:
- or (fwd) will be stripped.
-
- &(week) The day of the week that the original message
- was sent.
-
- &(date) The date the original message was sent in the form
- DD MMM YYYY, where DD is the day of the month,
- MMM is month in the form Jan, Feb, Mar, etc, and
- YYYY is the full 4 digit year.
-
- &(date1) Same as &(date).
-
- &(date2) The date in the form MMM DD, YYYY.
-
- &(time) The time the original message was sent in the
- form HH:MM xM where HH is the hour on a 12 hour
- clock, MM is the minute, and xM is AM or PM.
-
- &(to) The email address the message was sent to. For
- mailing lists this could be the name of the mailing
- list if that is what appeared in the To: header.
-
- The "Quote Header" is designed to be modified by the user and can be
- changed with the string gadget. This change is only in effect for this
- message however. You can permanently change the "Quote Header" with the
- General Parameters page of the Configuration screen.
-
- Whether on not the quoted message's headers are to be included in the
- quote is controlled by the "Incl Hdr in Resp" item under the Messages main
- menu. If this item is checked the "Date", "To", "From:", "Reply To:",
- "Subject:", "cc:", and "bcc:" headers will be displayed from the original
- message. If it is not checked, no header information will be included.
-
- The amount of header information in the quoted message is also controlled
- by the "Display Full Hdr" item in the Messages menu.
-
- The row of gadgets below the "Quote Header:" is used to specify
- characteristics of your signature file if you want one. They work in
- conjunction with the full path name of your current active signature file
- shown in the title bar of the Compose Message window.
-
- If a signature file is present, the "Add Signature Block" box will be
- checked and the path name of that signature file will appear in the title
- bar. If a signature file is not present, this checkbox will be disabled.
- The default signature file is AEMail:.signature. However, if you are a
- registered user, you can change to any other signature file by clicking on
- the [Select Signature] gadget. This will call up a file requester in
- which you can select the appropriate file. The file does not have to
- exist; you can create it with the [Edit Signature] gadget.
-
- If you are an un-registered user, the [Select Signature] button will be
- ghosted and you can only use the standard AEMail:.signature file.
-
- If you want to create or edit the current selected signature file, you can
- click on the [Edit Signature] button. This will call up your editor to
- allow you to create or edit the selected signature file. After you have
- edited or created your signature file in your editor, save the file and
- exit from the editor. This will return you to the COMPOSE MESSAGE window
- and the "Add Signature Block" check box will be enabled.
-
- If you do not want the signature block placed at the end of your message,
- uncheck the Add Signature Block box.
-
- Note: if the message is being edited, the Add Signature Block box WILL
- NOT be checked. This is done to prevent two signature blocks being added
- to the message. However, rather than disable this item, it is left to
- allow the user to add a signature block in the event one was not added to
- the original message or you selected the "New Message" radio button.
-
- The [Add Attachments] button brings up the Add Attachments Requster which
- is described below. This requester allows you to add one or multiple
- files as attachments to your message. You can bring up this requester at
- any time. If it is brought up a second time, the old attachment
- information will appear in the attachment list. You can add to this
- information or delete entries as you desire.
-
- The [Compose/Edit Message] gadget calls up the editor you specified in the
- General Parameters page of the Configuration Screen. If you are editing a
- previously composed message, you will see that message in your editor
- window. You can make changes as appropriate. Also, if you specified
- "Quote Original Message Text" you will see the quoted text. You can
- delete and insert lines as appropriate.
-
- One of the things you will NOT see in the editor window are your message
- headers or the signature block unless it is an edited message. The
- signature block is always added after you compose the message. If this is
- a "new" message, you will see a blank editor screen when the editor is
- first called. Enter whatever text you wish to use in your editor's window
- and then select "Save" and "Quit" from your editor's menus. This will
- return you to the Compose Message window.
-
- You will not be able to edit or add headers when you [Compose/Edit
- Message]. If you need to add additional headers to a message you can use
- the [Add Headers] gadget to add the headers. This feature is ONLY
- available to registered users. Un-registered users will find this gadget
- ghosted.
-
- Clicking on the [Add Headers] gadget will bring up the Add Headers window
- which is very similar to the "Information" window for a icon which is
- called from the Workbench menus. The Add Headers window looks like this:
-
- |=============================================================|
- |[o] Add Additional Headers |
- |=============================================================|
- | |
- | ====================================================|
- | Headers | | ||
- | | | ||
- | | | ||
- |[ NEW ] | | ||
- | ====================================================|
- |[DELETE] [ ]|
- | |
- | [ SAVE ] [CLEAR ALL] [CANCEL] |
- | |
- |=============================================================|
-
- Your additional headers will appear in the scrolling list. To add a
- header to the list, click on [NEW] and enter the complete header line in
- the string gadget below the scrolling list. Be sure and include the
- header identifier as well as the header text. To add this new header to
- this list hit the [RETURN] key. To transfer a header to the string
- gadget for editing or deleting it, click on the header line in the
- scrolling list. Clicking on [DELETE] will then delete the header from the
- list. If you want to edit the header, make the changes you want and then
- hit [RETURN]. When you are satisified with the headers you want to add,
- click on [SAVE] and the new headers will be saved and added to your
- message. [CLEAR ALL] will clear all the headers from the list and
- [CANCEL] will cancel the operations.
-
- At the bottom of the Compose Window is a row of four action buttons as
- follows:
-
- [Send Message Now] [Queue Message] [Save In Pending] [Cancel Message]
-
- If you decide that you do not want to compose a message after
- all, click on the [Cancel Message] button to exit the COMPOSE MESSAGE
- window.
-
- Otherwise, if all the correct information has been added in the
- COMPOSE MESSAGE window, click on the appropriate action button
- at the bottom of the window. [Save In Pending] will save your newly
- created message in the PENDING folder. [Queue Message] will place the
- message in the QUEUED folder and [Send Message Now] will send the message
- provided that you are connected to you Internet Provider. If you were
- unsuccesful with sending the message, it will be stored in the QUEUED
- folder to allow you to immediately send the message when you re-connect to
- your Internet Service Provider.
-
- Add Attachments Requester
- =========================
-
- When you click on the [ADD ATTACHMENTS] button on the Compose Message
- Window, an Add Attachments Requester will be displayed which looks like
- this:
-
- |=============================================================|
- |[o] Add Attachments |
- |=============================================================|
- | |
- | Filename: [ ][REQ]|
- |Attachment Description: [ ]|
- | Content Type/SubType: [ ]|
- | =====================================|
- | | text/plain | ||
- | | text/enriched | ||
- | | text/richtext | ||
- | =====================================|
- | Encoding: |@| Plain Text ||
- | |
- | Mime Type/Sub-Type FileName Encoding |
- |=============================================================|
- || | ||
- || | ||
- || | ||
- || | ||
- |=============================================================|
- |[ ADD ] [DELETE] [ APPLY ] [CANCEL ]|
- | |
- |=============================================================|
-
- The Filename string gadget should contain the FULL path name and filename
- of the attachment. Clicking on the [REQ] gadget will bring up a file
- requester which will allow you to select the appropriate file. The
- filename portion of this string will be used as the "file=" parameter of
- the Content-Type MIME header and as the "filename=" parameter of the
- Content-Disposition MIME header.
-
- The initial directory that is chosen for the file requester is the
- directory that was set up in the "Add Attachment from Directory" string
- gadget in the Configuration: Default Path Parameters (see Configuration
- Screen under IV. Configuration above). If you are adding multiple
- attachments to the message, clicking on [REQ] will bring up the last
- directory that you used.
-
- If you enter a non-existant file, an error requester will be displayed
- when you try to [ADD] the file to the attachment list.
-
- The Attachment Description is an optional string gadget for entering a
- description of the attachment. If present, this string gadget will create
- a Content-Description MIME header.
-
- Content Type/SubType is a string gadget which contains the MIME Content
- Type/Subtype entry which will appear on the Content-Type MIME header.
- THIS IS A REQUIRED ENTRY UNLESS YOU ARE ADDING AN UUENCODED attachment.
- It is not used for UUENCODED attachments.
-
- A scrolling list below this gadget is used to select an appropriate
- type/sub-type. Predefined type/subtypes, as defined in RFC 1341 and
- RFC 1521, are included in this list as follows:
-
- text/plain
- text/enriched
- text/richtext
- message/rfc822
- message/partial
- message/external-body
- multipart/mixed
- multipart/alternative
- multipart/digest
- multipart/parallel
- application/octet-stream
- application/postscript
- image/gif
- image/jpeg
- audio/basic
- video/mpeg
-
- Also added to this list will be any additional type/subtypes added through
- the mailcap file and any type/subtypes encountered when displaying
- attachments during THIS RUN OF AEMAIL. AEMail has no way to remember
- differing type/subtypes that it encounters unless they are included in the
- mailcap file.
-
- You can also add your own type/subtype by directly entering it in the
- Content Type/SubType string gadget. Unless the type/subtype is well known
- and published, you should pick one of the existing types (text/, message/,
- application/, image/, audio/, or video/) and use a subtype beginning with
- "x-". As an example, you might want to define an IFF image (not part of
- the mime published standard) as:
-
- image/x-iff
-
- It is suggested that you use a mailcap entry for the image/x-iff to cause
- it to permanently appear in the list of Content Type/Subtypes.
- Attachments must be in the format you select. AEMail will do no
- conversion. As an example, if you select application/postscript, the file
- you attach should already be in postscript format.
-
- Also, DO NOT use the follwing types/subtypes:
-
- message/partial
- message/external-body
- multipart/mixed
- multipart/alternative
- multipart/digest
- multipart/parallel
-
- All of the multipart types are not supported except at the highest level
- (specifying the initial attachment list), and this is done automatically
- by the program.
-
- The encoding cycle gadget has four states as follows:
-
- Plain Text
- Quoted-Printable
- Encoded Binary
- UUENCODED
-
- Generally, "Plain Text" should be used for:
-
- text/
- message/
-
- The exception to this is when the attachment contains characters outside
- the range of ASCII 32 to ASCII 128 and you ISP can not handle 8-bit codes.
- If the document you are attaching contains these characters (usually
- present in documents using foriegn character sets), you should use
- "Quoted-Printable" or "Encoded Binary" encoding.
-
- Generally speaking "Encoded Binary" should be used for the following
- types:
-
- application/
- image/
- audio/
- video/
-
- "UUENCODED" should be selected if you want the attachment to be in
- UUENCODED format. You can not mix UUENCODED attachments with MIME
- attachments!
-
- When a type/subtype is selected, the appropriate encoding format is
- automatically selected. Of course, you can change this with the cycle
- gadget if there is a need.
-
- Once all of the attributes for any particular attachment are selected,
- click on the [ADD] gadget to add the attachment to the attachment list.
- If the Filename field or Content Type/Subtype field (other than for
- UUENCODED attachments) is blank an error requester will appear indicating
- that you must have a valid entry in these fields. As many attachments as
- you want can be added to this list, but you can not mix MIME type
- attachments with UUENCODED attachments.
-
- If you wish to delete any particular gadget, select the attachment from
- the list and click on [DELETE]. There is no way to modify attachment
- attributes once they have been added to the list. If you want to do this,
- first click on [DELETE], make the appropriate changes, and then click on
- [ADD].
-
- Once you are satisfied with your attachment list click on [APPLY]. The
- Add Attachments Requester will disappear and the attachments will be
- automatically added to your message after it is composed.
-
- If you decide that you don't want to add attachments after all, click on
- [CANCEL] and the attachments will not be added when you compose your
- message.
-
- Clicking on the Close Gadget at the top of the window has the same
- effect as if you clicked on [CANCEL].
-
- If you are editing a message which has attachments and you select the
- [ADD ATTACHMENTS] button in the Compose Window and then decide you do not
- want to change the attachments you have previously added, you should click
- on [APPLY]. Clicking on [CANCEL] at this point will bring up a special
- warning requester which says:
-
- Continuing will delete all previous attachments
- Use APPLY if you wish to keep them.
-
- [CONTINUE] [APPLY ATTACHMENTS]
-
- To keep the attachments you should click on [APPLY ATTACHMENTS].
-
- IX. AEMAIL AREXX INTERFACE
-
- Introduction
- ------------
-
- AEMail has a very powerful set of ARexx commands that can be used to
- control AEMail from external ARexx scripts. You can also execute ARexx
- scripts and AmigaDOS scripts from within AEMail with the use of the "Send
- AREXX/DOS Command" and the "Send Last Command" items in the Project Menu
- (see VII. AEMAIL MENUS).
-
- When you want to send commands from an ARexx script to AEMail, you must
- tell ARexx how to locate the AEMail ARexx message port. The AEMail ARexx
- Port Name is normally "AEMAIL1". You can change this port name with the
- use of the "AREXXPORT=" tool type (See TOOL TYPES under Section IV.
- CONFIGURATION). The current Arexx Port Name is shown in the About message
- obtained with the "About" item under the Project Menu.
-
- You tell ARexx what the message port name for AEMail is by using the ARexx
- ADDRESS commmand in an ARexx script like this:
-
- ADDRESS AEMAIL1
-
- If you call an ARexx script from AEMail, the ADDRESS command is
- automatically set to the AEMail ARexx message port.
-
- After each command directed at AEMail from an ARexx script is executed,
- the standard ARexx result variable, RC, will report the success or failure
- of the command. A 0 in RC indicates that the command was understood and
- executed successfully. An RC value other than 0 indicates an error
- severity indicator. The exact error text is reported in the Arexx
- AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable.
-
- All of the AEMail ARexx commands also report back information if they
- were executed successfully (RC = 0). This information is reported in the
- ARexx variable RESULT. To receive this information you must supply the
- following ARexx command at the beginning of the ARexx script:
-
- OPTIONS RESULTS
-
- You will notice that some commands have possible negative numbers for
- RESULT values. The RESULT variable usually returns either a numeric value
- or a string. If a numeric value is returned and if it is positive and
- above zero, the expected result was achieved. If the value was 0 or
- negative, the expected result was not achieved. Some commands that
- normally return strings in the RESULT variable may also return a NULL
- string or a negative numeric value. The negative numeric value is used to
- denote various reasons the string value was not returned. If there is
- only one reason, the command will normally return a "0" or a NULL value;
- but if there is more than one reason, the additional reasons will be
- indicated with a negative number. An example would be a command that is
- expected to return the Subject: from the current message. A result of
- NULL or blank indicates that there was no Subject: header and a result of
- "-1" indicates that there is no current message. These two conditions
- need to be distinguished.
-
- Below is a both a list of the currently available AEMail ARexx commands
- and a section which describes each command in detail. Many of the
- commands are available to registered users only. These will be so noted
- in the command list.
-
- Some of the commands are composed of multiple words. To avoid confusion
- these multiple words are sometimes separated by an underline character
- ("_"). As an example "ADDRESS_BOOK" separates ADDRESS and BOOK with the
- underline. This is to avoid confusion with "ADDRESS" which is a standard
- ARexx command. If an underline is required, it will be shown in the
- command syntax.
-
- QUOTING: Some command have parameters with embedded ARexx command
- characters such as +, -, |, etc. To avoid the possibilty of ARexx
- interpreting these as ARexx operations, the parameter should be surrounded
- by quotes (either single or double quotes). An example of where this is
- very important is the first parameter of the OKAY2 command. Each of the
- possible responses in the OKAY2 command is separated by a vertical bar
- ("|") such as "OK|CANCEL". The entire response parameter needs to be
- surrounded in quotes as shown or otherwise the vertical bar will be
- intrepreted by ARexx as an "inclusive or" operation.
-
- Another condition requiring quoting is passing strings with embedded
- spaces. This usually requires a bit of "creative" quoting because ARexx
- always strips at least one set of quotation marks from all strings.
- Fortunately ARexx considers both the double quote (") and the single quote
- (') as quotes. To provide for the proper treatment of strings with
- embedded spaces (such as some file and path names or title strings), you
- have to use a double grouping of quotes.
-
- For example:
-
- GETFILENAME '"The Title String"' '"A file name path"'
-
- will send "The Title String" and "A file name path" to AEMail which will
- recognize these strings as two quoted operands.
-
- ARexx variables which might have embedded spaces in their contents must
- also be quoted as above. You can do this as follows:
-
- filename = "A file name path"
- title = "The Title String"
- GETFILENAME '"'title'"' '"'filename'"'
-
- This ensures that ARexx, when it strips off a set of quotation marks and
- replaces the variables with their contents, will also pass a set of
- quotation marks around the resulting strings. AEMail will then recognize
- the passed strings as two string operands rather than many unconnected
- words.
- Synopsis of ARexx Commands
- --------------------------
-
- The following is a list of the currently available AEMail ARexx commands.
- This list also indicates which commands are only available to registered
- users with an (R) following the command.
-
- A complete description of all of the commands and the command variations
- follows this list.
-
- ADDRESS_BOOK (R) Manipulates the AEMail Address Book
- BCC (R) Returns the BCC header in a message
- CC (R) Returns the CC header in a message
- COMPOSE Composes a message
- CURRENT IS SELECTED Makes the selected message current
- DATE (R) Returns the DATE header in a message
- EXTRACT (R) Parses a name string to real name or email address
- FIRST (R) Selects first message in folder or name in name string
- FLAGS (R) Returns the flags in a message
- FOLDER (R) Returns information on folders
- FROM (R) Returns the FROM header in a message
- GETCLIP (R) Get a clip from the clipboard
- GETFILENAME Brings up the AEMail file requester
- GETNUMBER Brings up the AEMail numeric requester
- GETSIZE (R) Returns the size of a message or message body
- GETSTRING Brings up the AEMail string requester
- LAST (R) Selects last message in a folder
- MESSAGE (R) Sets various flags in a message
- NEXT (R) Selects next message in folder or name in name string
- OKAY1 Brings up AEMail notification requester
- OKAY2 Brings up AEMail notification requester with responses
- PREVIOUS (R) Selects the previous message in a folder
- QUEUE Queues a passed message
- REPLYTO (R) Returns the REPLY-TO header in a message
- SAVE (R) Saves a message or message text
- SCREENTOBACK Brings a screen to the back of the display
- SCREENTOFRONT Brings a screen to the front of the display
- SUBJECT (R) Returns the SUBJECT header in a message
- TO (R) Returns the TO header in a message
-
-
- ARexx Commands
- --------------
-
- The following is a description of all of the currently available AEMail
- ARexx commands in alphabetical order. Shown with each of the commands is
- what you can expect to have returned in the RESULT variable. Please note
- the use of the OKAY1 and OKAY2 commands. You can use these to report back
- information to the AEMail user. These commands put up a requester with
- the information you provide.
-
- You will also notice in the command descriptions the use of the term
- "current message". This applies to ARexx commands only and is not the
- "selected message" that is indicated by an asterick (*) in the displayed
- message list; although, you can make the most recent (current) "selected
- message" the "current message" (see the CURRENT IS SELECTED command below)
- and you can "select" a current message (the MESSAGE SELECT command).
- Initially "current message" is un-defined, but once it is defined it will
- remain defined through multiple calls from ARexx scripts until AEMail
- terminates or the "current message" is changed through the use of another
- ARexx command.
-
-
-
- ADDRESS_BOOK
-
- This command is used to manipulate the AEMail Address Book. There are a
- number of variations of the ADDRESS_BOOK command. They are listed below.
- If the correct command keyword ("LIST", "FIND", "ADD", etc.) is not
- present, an RC code of severity level 5 will be returned and
- AEMAIL.LASTERROR will contain "101: Syntax Error".
-
- Note the use of the parameter called "userid". This can be either an
- email address or a referenced nickname pointing to another individual or
- group entry. When a userid is returned, you can test if it is a nickname
- by using the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE command.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK LIST ALL [pad]
- ADDRESS_BOOK LIST GROUP [pad]
- ADDRESS_BOOK LIST INDIVIDUAL [pad]
-
- This command will list the nicknames in your address book. The operand
- "ALL" will list all of the nicknames, the operand "GROUP" will list just
- the group nicknames, and "INDIVIDUAL" will list just the individual
- nicknames.
-
- Normally each nickname is separated by a space. However, this can be
- changed by a specifying a pad string at the end of the command. You can
- use the LF keyword to specify a line feed or use some other character
- sequence for the pad string. As an example: ", " will insert a comma
- followed by a space between each nickname in the list.
-
- RESULT: The list of nicknames separated by the pad character.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK FIND nickname [userid]
-
- This command is used to find out if a particular userid (email address or
- referenced nickname) is contained in a group entry in the Address Book.
- You can explicity give the userid or the email address can be obtained
- from the current message. If the userid is not specified, both the From:
- and Reply-To: addresses from the current message will be used to check if
- the email address is in the group entry specified by nickname. The
- nickname operand is required and must be a group nickname.
-
- RESULT: -3 No current message if userid not given
- -2 The nickname is not for a group entry in the Address
- Book
- -1 The nickname given is not in the Address Book.
- 0 The userid was not found
- 1 The userid found. If not supplied, the userid that
- was found was an email address from the From: address
- in the current message.
- 2 The Reply-To: address in the current message was found
- in the group.
- 3 Both the Reply-To: and From: addresses were found.
- Note: these addresses may actually be the same.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK CREATE GROUP nickname ["SEND-HEADER-ONLY"|SHO],
- FROM|REPLYTO|userid description
-
- This entry creates a new group entry in the Address Book. When you create
- a group entry you must have one userid (email address or referenced
- nickname) entry to place in the group. You are not allowed to have a
- group without any entries.
-
- The nickname for the new group must be supplied and it must not be greater
- than 9 characters. It can not, of course, match any existing nickname.
-
- "SEND-HEADER-ONLY" is an optional keyword operand which sets the "Send
- Header Only" flag in the group entry and must be quoted. You can use the
- shorthand abreviation "SHO" instead of the full "SEND-HEADER-ONLY" string.
-
- The userid which is added can be explicity specified or it can be the
- email address taken from either the From: or Reply-To: address in the
- current message. Use the keyword operands "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify
- which header field in the current message is to be used. If you specify
- "REPLYTO" and that header is missing, an error condition will be returned
- (see below).
-
- There is no validation performed on the user_id. If it is an email
- address it should be one word without any intervening spaces. It should
- be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
- If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
- pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.
-
- The description operand is placed in the "Real Name" field in the Address
- Book entry and must be given. It may have embedded spaces and should be
- quoted. If you want quotes to appear in the group description you should
- use the ARexx method for including embedded quotes (i.e.,
- '"....string...."' or '"'variable'"'.
-
-
- RESULT: -4 The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
- Reply-To: header in the current message.
- -3 No current message if userid not given
- -1 The nickname given is greater than 9 characters.
- 0 The nickname given was already defined in the Address
- Book.
- 1 The group entry was successfully created.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK ADD TO GROUP nickname FROM
- ADDRESS_BOOK ADD TO GROUP nickname REPLYTO
- ADDRESS_BOOK ADD TO GROUP nickname userid
-
- This command adds an userid (email address or referenced nickname) to an
- existing group in the Address Book. The nickname operand specifies the
- group the userid is to be added to and is a required parameter.
-
- The userid which is added can be explicity specified or it can be the
- email address taken from either the From: or Reply-To: address in the
- current message. Use the keyword operands "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify
- which header field in the current message is to be used. If you specify
- "REPLYTO" and that header is missing, an error condition will be returned
- (see below).
-
- There is no validation performed on the user_id. If it is an email
- address it should be one word without any intervening spaces. It should
- be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
- If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
- pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.
-
-
- RESULT: -4 The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
- Reply-To: header in the current message.
- -3 No current message if userid not specified.
- -2 The nickname is not for a group entry in the Address
- Book
- -1 The nickname given was not found.
- 0 The userid given was already defined in the group.
- 1 The userid was successfully added to the group.
-
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK ADD INDIVIDUAL nickname FROM [real-name]
- ADDRESS_BOOK ADD INDIVIDUAL nickname REPLYTO [real-name]
- ADDRESS_BOOK ADD INDIVIDUAL nickname userid [real-name]
-
- This command adds a new individual nickname to the Address Book. The
- nickname for the new group must be supplied and it must not be greater
- than 9 characters. It can not, of course, match any existing nickname.
-
- The userid which is assign to the new nickname is required and can be
- explicity specified or it can be the email address taken from either the
- From: or Reply-To: header in the current message. Use the keyword
- operands "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify which header field in the current
- message is to be used. If you specify "REPLYTO" and that header is
- missing, an error condition will be returned (see below).
-
- There is no validation performed on the user_id. If it is an email
- address it should be one word without any intervening spaces. It should
- be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
- If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
- pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.
-
- The real-name operand is placed in the "Real Name" field in the Address
- Book entry. It is an optional entry. It may have intervening spaces. It
- should be quoted. If you want quotes to appear in the group description
- you should use the ARexx method for including embedded quotes (i.e.,
- '"....string...."' or '"'variable'"'.
-
- If a current message is used to obtain the userid (either the "FROM" or
- "REPLYTO" keyword operands) any real name supplied with the header will
- take precedence over the real-name operand if it is present.
-
- RESULT: -4 The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
- Reply-To: header in the current message.
- -3 No current message if userid not specified.
- -1 The nickname given is greater than 9 characters.
- 0 The nickname given was already defined.
- 1 The nickname and userid was successfully added to the
- Address Book.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE FROM GROUP nickname FROM
- ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE FROM GROUP nickname REPLYTO
- ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE FROM GROUP nickname userid
-
- This command deletes a userid from the group indicated by nickname.
-
- The userid which is to be deleted is required and can be explicity
- specified or it can be the email address taken from either the From: or
- Reply-To: address in the current message. Use the keyword operands
- "FROM" or "REPLYTO" to specify which header field in the current message
- is to be used. If you specify "REPLYTO" and that header is missing, an
- error condition will be returned (see below).
-
- There is no validation performed on the user_id. If it is an email
- address it should be one word without any intervening spaces. It should
- be within a quoted string to avoid confusion with ARexx special symbols.
- If it is a nickname with embedded spaces it must be double quoted (two
- pairs of quote marks - ie, '"........"'.
-
- If the userid is the only userid in the group, it will not be deleted.
- No group can exist without at lease one userid. In this special case a
- RESULT code of -5 will be returned. To delete the one remaining userid
- you must delete the entire group (see "ADDRESS-BOOK DELETE GROUP" below.
-
- RESULT: -5 The userid specified was the only userid in the
- group and WAS NOT DELETED. Use the "ADDRESS_BOOK
- DELETE GROUP" command to delete entire group.
- -4 The REPLYTO operand was specified and there is no
- Reply-To: header in the current message.
- -3 No current message if userid not specified.
- -2 The nickname is not for a group entry in the Address
- Book
- -1 The nickname given was not found.
- 0 The userid was not present in the group.
- 1 The userid was deleted from the group.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE GROUP nickname
-
- This command deletes the entire group specified by nickname and all of
- it's associated userids.
-
- RESULT: -2 The nickname given is not for a group entry in the
- Address Book
- -1 The nickname given was not found.
-
- 1 The group was successfully deleted.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK DELETE INDIVIDUAL nickname
-
- This command deletes the nickname provided. It must be the nickname for
- an individual.
-
- RESULT: -2 The nickname given is for a group entry in the
- Address Book. No deletion was performed.
- 0 The individual's nickname was not present.
- 1 The individual's nickname was successfully deleted.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE
-
- This command obtains the type, group or individual, for the Address Book
- entry specified by "nickname".
-
- RESULT: -1 The nickname given does not exist.
- 0 Nickname was for an individual entry.
- 1 Nickname was for a group entry.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname REALNAME
-
- This command obtains the "Real Name" or Group Description for the Address
- Book entry specified by "nickname".
-
- RESULT: -1 The nickname given does not exist.
- NULL or blank No real name was present.
- "Real Name" or group description string
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname USERID
-
- This command obtains the userid for the Address Book entry specified by
- "nickname". This command can only be used with Individual nicknames.
-
- RESULT: -2 The nickname given is not for an individual entry.
- -1 The nickname given does not exist.
- "userid" This may be either an email address or a referenced
- nickname. Use the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE
- command to determine if it is a nickname rather than
- an email address.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname "SEND-HEADER-ONLY-FLAG"|"SHO-FLAG"
-
- This command obtains the state of the "Send Header Only" flag for the
- group entry specified by "nickname". The operand can be specified as
- either "SEND-HEADER-ONLY-FLAG" or "SHO-FLAG" and must be quoted. This
- command can only be used with Group nicknames.
-
- RESULT: -2 The nickname given was not for a group entry.
- -1 The nickname given does not exist.
- 0 The "Send Header Only" Flag was OFF.
- 1 The "Send Header Only" Flag was ON.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname COUNT
-
- This command obtains the count of userid entries in the group entry
- specified by "nickname". This command is can only be used with Group
- nicknames.
-
- RESULT: -2 The nickname given was not for a group entry.
- -1 The nickname given does not exist.
-
- n The count of userids in the group entry.
-
-
- BCC
-
- Syntax: BCC
-
- This command returns the bcc: header of the current message without the
- bcc:. It has no operands.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No bcc: header
- bcc: header
-
-
- CC
-
-
- Syntax: CC
-
- This command returns the cc: header of the current message without the
- cc:. It has no operands.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No cc: header
- cc: header
-
-
- COMPOSE
-
- All of the variations of the COMPOSE command bring up the AEMail compose
- window for further action. If for any reason the Compose window returns
- any error such as the failure to open the Compose window or an out of
- memory condition, the error will be returned in AEMAIL.LASTERROR with the
- RC set to a severity level of 20. This error will not have an error
- number associated with it.
-
- The syntax of the various variations of the COMPOSE command are as
- follows:
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE
-
- The COMPOSE command without any operands brings up the Compose window to
- compose a new message.
-
- RESULT: 0: User canceled message compose. No message composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE NEW MESSAGE
-
- The Compose window will be brought up to compose a new message.
-
- RESULT: 0: User canceled message compose. No message composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE REPLY
-
- The Compose window will be brought up to compose a reply to the current
- message using the Reply-To: address as the recipient. If the Reply-To:
- address is not available, the From: address will be used.
-
- RESULT: -1: There is no current message defined.
- 0: The user cancelled the operation. No message was
- composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE REPLY FROM
-
- The Compose window will be brought up to compose a reply to the current
- message using the From: address as the recipient.
-
- RESULT: -1: There is no current message defined.
- 0: The user cancelled the operation. No message was
- composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE FORWARD [userid]
-
- The Compose window will be brought up to forward the current message. If
- the userid (email address or referenced Address Book nickname) is
- provided, this will be used as the recipient (To: address) of the
- forwarded message; otherwise, the To: address will be blank and user will
- have to provide it.
-
- RESULT: -1: There is no current message defined.
- 0: The user cancelled the operation. No message was
- composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE MAILTO userid
-
- The Compose window will be brought up to compose a new message to be
- mailed to the recipient indicated by the userid. The userid can be either
- an Address Book nickname or a full email-address and must be given.
-
- No validation is made on the userid. If it is invalid, either the user
- will receive an error when the message is sent or a message will be
- received indicating "Returned mail: User unknown".
-
- RESULT: 0: The user cancelled the operation. No message was
- composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in the PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in the QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: COMPOSE "message-file-name"
-
- The Compose window will be brought up and the message file indicated by
- "message-file-name" will be read into the system and used as the message
- to edit. This message must have correctly formatted headers. Only the
- To:, From:, Reply-To:, Subject:, cc:, and bcc: headers will be recognized.
- A blank line must separate the headers from the body of the message.
-
- The "message-file-name" should be the full path name of the message file
- and it should be quoted since the path will contain characters that ARexx
- will attempt to interpret as operators or possibly embedded spaces.
-
- Any address provided with the To: header can be either an Address Book
- nickname or a full email address. Multiple To: addresses can be provided
- as well as multiple cc: or bcc: addresses.
-
- No headers have to be provided with the message. The headers can be
- provided on the Compose window. However, if this is done, a blank line
- MUST precede the message body in the message file.
-
- Additional RC type errors can be received by this command if the
- message-file-name is invalid or an error occurred reading in the message
- file. Each of these errors have a severity level of 5 with one of the
- following messages placed in the AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable:
-
- 105: Error Opening Passed Message
- 106: Error retrieving passed message
-
- If you would like to use the File Requester to obtain the file name before
- passing it to this command, you can use the GETFILENAME command to obtain
- the full path name of the message.
-
- No validation is made on the To: address in the message. If it is
- invalid, either the user will receive an error when the message is sent or
- a message will be received indicating "Returned mail: User unknown".
-
- RESULT: 0: The user cancelled the operation. No message was
- composed.
- 1: Message composed and placed in PENDING folder.
- 2: Message composed and placed in QUEUED folder.
- 3: Message composed and sent.
-
-
-
- CURRENT IS SELECTED
-
- Syntax: CURRENT IS SELECTED
-
- This command makes the currently selected message the current message.
- The currently selected message is the message that is highlighted in the
- message list or the message that is currently being displayed. The
- message may or may not have a selection asterick.
-
- RESULT: 0 There was no selected message.
- 1 Current message is now the selected message.
-
-
-
- DATE
-
- Syntax: DATE
- DATE MDY
- DATE DMY
- DATE YMD
-
- This command returns the Date: header of the current message header
- without the "Date:".
-
- Without an operand, this command returns the date as it was received in
- the Date: header of the message. With the operand "MDY" it returns the
- date as mm/dd/yy. The operand "DMY" returns the date as dd/mm/yy and
- "YMD" returns yy/mm/dd. All of the fields are two digits which means that
- yy will be the last 2 digits of the year.
-
- The alternate formats are provided so that the date field can be stored in
- a data base such as one created with "Final Data".
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No Date: header
- Date: field
-
- EXTRACT
-
- Syntax: EXTRACT REALNAME name-string
- EXTRACT USERID name-string
-
- This command extracts either the REALNAME or the USERID (email address
- or address book nickname) from a name string that is usually the result of
- the FIRST TONAME, FIRST CCNAME, FIRST BCCNAME or NEXT NAME commands
- (see below). Because of the various formats of a name string; ie,
-
- email-address (Full Name)
- Full Name <email-address>
- email-address
- addressbook-nickname
-
- it is easier to use this command rather then to use standard ARexx
- commands to parse the name string.
-
- If you use the ADDRESS_BOOK GET nickname TYPE command you can determine if
- a userid that is returned is a nickname or email address.
-
- The name-string variable should be quoted since it will contain blanks and
- other characters ARexx may not like including double quote marks. As an
- example:
-
- OPTION RESULTS
- FIRST TONAME
- name=RESULT
- if name = "" THEN EXIT
- EXTRACT USERID '"'name'"'
- emailaddr=RESULT
- ADDRESS_BOOK GET '"'emailaddr'"' TYPE
- if RESULT = 0 THEN OKAY1 emailaddr" is an individual nickname."
- ELSE if RESULT = 1 THEN OKAY1 emailaddr" is a group nickname."
-
- RESULT: NULL or blank No real name if REAL-NAME operand used.
- Either the real name or userid string.
- FIRST
-
- This command is used to select the first message in the current folder or
- to select the first name string from the list of To: or cc: recipients.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FIRST
- FIRST NEW
- FIRST SELECTED
- FIRST DELETED
-
- Without an Operand this command selects the first message in the current
- selected folder as the current message.
-
- With the NEW operand, this command selects the first un-read (new) message
- in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
- message.
-
- With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the first selected
- (message marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder
- as the current message.
-
- With the DELETED operand, this command selects the first message marked as
- deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- NOTE: The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
- This generally means that the first message is the oldest message in the
- folder.
-
- RESULT: 0 No messages of the particular type in the folder
- 1 First message is now the current message.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FIRST TONAME
- FIRST CCNAME
- FIRST BCCNAME
-
- This command returns the first name from the appropriate header field
- (To:, cc:, or bcc:) in the current message. The name can be in one of the
- following formats:
-
- email-address (Full Name)
- Full Name <email-address>
- email-address
- addressbook-nickname
-
- Names in the header recipient lists are separated by commas; however, a
- comma may be embedded within a real name if the real name is surrounded by
- quotes.
-
- If you wish to extract either the Full Name, email-address, or the
- addressbook-nickname from the RESULT you can set the RESULT to a variable
- and then use the EXTRACT command with that variable as the argument.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no current message
- NULL or blank There are no names in this field.
- The first name in the appropriate header.
-
-
- FLAGS
-
- Syntax: FLAGS
-
- This command returns the flags for the current message. The flags are
- returned in the RESULT field as indicated below. A message can have
- multiple flags which means that a value will be returned with the two or
- more values for the flags added together. As an example, a message that
- is unread and new with attachments will return a value of 11. You will
- need to use the ARexx operator for logical AND to isolate the flag you
- want.
-
- Here is a piece of ARexx code to isolate a message that is unread:
-
- OPTION RESULTS
-
- FLAGS
-
- IF RESULT = -1 THEN OKAY1 "There is no current message"
- ELSE DO
-
- IF RESULT & 2 THEN OKAY1 "This message is unread"
- ELSE OKAY1 "This message has been read"
-
- END
-
- Note the distinction between flag values 1 (for New) and 2 (for Unread).
- Generally, when a message is first read into the system both flags are
- set. If the message is read, both flags are turned off. However, if the
- message should be deleted without being read, the Unread flag will be
- turned off but the New flag will remain on. If that message then becomes
- un-deleted and the New flag is still on, the Unread flag will be turned
- back on.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- 0 There is a current message but no flags are set
- 1 Message is New and unread (can be deleted)
- 2 Message is unread but not deleted
- 4 Message is a reply
- 8 Message has attachments
- 16 Message has been forwarded
- 32 Message is deleted
- 64 Message is selected
-
-
- FOLDER
-
- There are a number of variations of the FOLDER command. They are listed
- below:
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER
-
- The FOLDER command with no operands is used to return the current selected
- folder name.
-
- RESULT: 0 No folder currently selected
- The folder Name (i.e., "INBOX", "QUEUED", etc.)
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER LIST_FOLDERS [pad]
-
- This command will list all of the folders in your system. Normally each
- folder is separated by a space. However, this can be changed by
- specifying a pad string at the end of the command. You can use the LF
- keyword to specify a line feed or use some other character sequence for
- the pad string. As an example: ", " will insert a comma followed by a
- space between each folder name in the list.
-
- Notice that the keyword here is LIST_FOLDERS with an underline between
- LIST and FOLDERS. If the keyword was simply LIST it might be
- mis-interpreted as a folder named LIST.
-
- RESULT: The list of folders separated by the pad character.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER folder-name
-
- This command selects the the folder indicated by folder-name.
-
- RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid. Could be the result of a misspelling
- of one of the operands used with the FOLDER commands so that
- the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
- 0: The folder folder-name could not be selected.
- 1: The folder folder-name was selected.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER DESCRIPTION
- FOLDER folder-name DESCRIPTION
- FOLDER folder-name SELECT DESCRIPTION
-
- This command returns the description of either the selected folder or, if
- present, the folder indicated by folder name. If the folder name is
- present, it will not become the new selected unless the SELECT keyword
- immediately follows it. This allows you to obtain the description of a
- folder without selecting it.
-
- NOTE: If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
- parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
- being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid. Could be the result of a misspelling
- of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
- so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- The description of either the folder specified with folder-name
- or the selected folder.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER NUMBER_MESSAGES
- FOLDER folder-name NUMBER_MESSAGES
- FOLDER folder-name SELECT NUMBER_MESSAGES
-
- This command returns the number of messages contained in either the
- selected folder or, if present, the folder indicated by folder name. If
- the folder name is present, it will not become the new selected folder
- unless the SELECT keyword immediately follows it. This allows you to
- obtain the number of messages from a folder without selecting it.
-
- Please note the spelling of the operand NUMBER_MESSAGES with the underline
- between NUMBER and MESSAGES. This makes the operand string longer than a
- folder-name so that it does not interfer with any existing folder-name.
-
- NOTE: If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
- parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
- being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid. Could be the result of a misspelling
- of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
- so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- n: The total number of messages in the folder including ones that
- are unread or deleted.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER NEW_MESSAGES
- FOLDER folder-name NEW_MESSAGES
- FOLDER folder-name SELECT NEW_MESSAGES
-
- This command returns the number of new (unread) messages contained in
- either the selected folder or, if present, the folder indicated by folder
- name. If the folder name is present, it will not become the new selected
- folder unless the SELECT keyword immediately follows it. This allows you
- to obtain the number of new messages from a folder without selecting it.
-
- If a message is unread but deleted, it will not be included in the count
- of new messages.
-
- Please note the spelling of the operand NEW_MESSAGES with the underline
- between NEW and MESSAGES. This makes the operand string longer than a
- folder-name so that it does not interfer with any existing folder-name.
-
- NOTE: If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
- parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
- being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid. Could be the result of a misspelling
- of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
- so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- n: The number of new or unread messages in the folder.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: FOLDER DELETED_MESSAGES
- FOLDER folder-name DELETED_MESSAGES
- FOLDER folder-name SELECT DELETED_MESSAGES
-
- This command returns the number of deleted messages contained in either
- the selected folder or, if present, the folder indicated by folder name.
- If the folder name is present, it will not become the new selected folder
- unless the SELECT keyword immediately follows it. This allows you to
- obtain the number of deleted messages from a folder without selecting it.
-
- Please note the spelling of the operand DELETED_MESSAGES with the
- underline between DELETED and MESSAGES. This makes the operand string
- longer than a folder-name so that it does not interfer with any existing
- folder-name.
-
- NOTE: If the folder-name is left off the command and any of the
- parameters is misspelled, it could result in the misspelled parameter
- being mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- RESULT: -1: folder-name is invalid. Could be the result of a misspelling
- of one of the operands used with the following FOLDER commands
- so that the operand is mis-interpreted as a folder-name.
-
- n: The number of deleted messages in the folder.
-
- ***
-
- FROM
-
- Syntax: FROM
-
- This command returns the From: header of the current message without the
- "From: ". It has no operands.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No From: header
- From: header
-
- GETCLIP
-
- Syntax: GETCLIP
- GETCLIP n
- GETCLIP UNIT n
-
- This command will return the current contents of the clipboard in the
- result variable. If "UNIT n" or "n" is not specified, it will be from the
- current active clipboard. If "UNIT n" or "n" (without UNIT) is specified
- it will be from the clipboard unit specified by n.
-
- If the clipboard unit is specified, the current active clipboard will be
- changed to that unit UNLESS the clipboard unit was non-existant.
-
- RESULT: NULL or blank This clipboard unit is empty or non-existant.
- Data from the clipboard unit.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: GETCLIP UNIT
-
- This command will return the current active clipboard unit number. Notice
- that is similar to the previous command WITHOUT the clipboard unit number
- (n).
-
- RESULT: n This current active clipboard unit number.
-
-
- GETFILENAME
-
- Syntax: GETFILENAME
- GETFILENAME title
- GETFILENAME title defaultpath
-
- This command brings up the AEMail file requester so you can solicit file
- names that can be used with commands that require file names.
-
- If no operands are provided with this command, the file requester will
- have "ARexx File Request" as the default title in the requester and a
- default path of PROGDIR: (the directory from which AEMail was called).
-
- The second form of this command allows you to provide your own title in
- the file requester which may be more descriptive of what kind of file you
- want.
-
- The third form gives the user the ability to provide both a title and a
- default file path and (if wanted) filename. This is particularly useful
- if you want to reference a different directory than your program
- directory. A default filename can be part of this path.
-
- NOTE: If you supply a default path without a filename (directory only) you
- must end the string with ":" or "/" to indicate that it is a directory and
- not a filename path.
-
- Be very careful in using this command since this is one that will require
- "creative" quoting to insure that you have no more than two operand
- strings. As an example you should use something like this:
-
- GETFILENAME '"The Title String"' '"A file name path"'
-
- This will send "The Title String" and "A file name path" to AEMail which
- will recognize these strings as two quoted operands.
-
- RESULT: NULL or blank if the no filename was entered or the requester was
- cancelled.
- The full path and filename of the file that was selected.
- GETNUMBER
-
- Syntax: GETNUMBER
- GETNUMBER title
- GETNUMBER title default
- GETNUMBER title default min
- GETNUMBER title default min max
-
- This command brings up the AEMail numeric requester so you can solicit a
- numeric value.
-
- If no operands are provided with this command, the numeric requester will
- have "ARexx Enter Number" as the default title in the requester and a
- default value of 0.
-
- The second form of this command allows you to provide your own title in
- the numeric requester which may be more descriptive of what purpose you
- want the number for.
-
- The third form gives the user the ability to provide both a title and a
- default numeric value.
-
- The fourth form gives you the ability to provide a minimum value that can
- be entered, and the fifth for allows both a minimum or maximum value. f
- a value outside this range is entered, the screen will flash. Also, the
- minimum and maximum limits are given in a text string below the numeric
- entry gadget.
-
- Be very careful in using this command since this is one that will require
- "creative" quoting for the title to insure that strings between embedded
- spaces are not interpreted as part of the numeric values. As an example
- you should use something like this:
-
- GETNUMBER '"Enter a number between 3 & 7"' 5 3 7
-
- This will place "Enter a number between 3 & 7" in the title bar of the
- requester, use 5 as the default value in the numeric entry gadget, and set
- the minimum and maximum possibilities to 3 and 7 respectively. This will
- also recognize the full title string as a proper quoted operand.
-
- RESULT: NULL or blank if the the requester was cancelled.
- n The numeric value entered in the requester.
-
- GETSIZE
-
- Syntax: GETSIZE MESSAGE
- GETSIZE TEXT
-
- This command will get the size of the Current Message. If the operand
- "MESSAGE" is given, it will be the size of the complete message. If the
- operand "TEXT" is given, it will be only the size of the text portion of
- the message (Message size less the header size and any attachment size).
-
- RESULT: 0 No Current Message
- The size of the Current Message or just the text size.
-
- GETSTRING
-
- Syntax: GETSTRING
- GETSTRING title
- GETSTRING title defaultstring
-
- This command brings up the AEMail string requester so you can solicit a
- string from the user.
-
- If no operands are provided with this command, the string requester will
- have "ARexx Enter String" as the default title in the requester with no
- default string.
-
- The second form of this command allows you to provide your own title in
- the string requester which may be more descriptive of what purpose you
- want the string for.
-
- The third form gives the user the ability to provide both a title and a
- default string that will appear in the requester when it is first brought
- up.
-
- Be very careful in using this command since this is one that will require
- "creative" quoting to insure that you have no more than two operand
- strings. As an example you should use something like this:
-
- GETFILENAME '"Enter a Folder Name"' '"INBOX"'
-
- This will send "Enter a Folder Name" and "INBOX" to AEMail which will
- recognize these strings as two separate quoted operands. Since INBOX is
- one word, it does not have to have the special quoting on it but can be
- simply 'INBOX'.
-
- RESULTS: NULL or blank if the no string was entered or the requester was
- cancelled.
- The string that was entered in the requester.
- LAST
-
- Syntax: LAST
- LAST NEW
- LAST SELECTED
- LAST DELETED
-
- Without an Operand this command selects the last message in the current
- selected folder as the current message.
-
- With the NEW operand, this command selects the last un-read (new) message
- in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
- message.
-
- With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the last selected
- (message marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder
- as the current message.
-
- With the DELETED operand, this command selects the last message marked as
- deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- NOTE: The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
- This generally means that the last message is the newest message in the
- folder.
-
- RESULT: 0 No messages of the particular type in the folder
- 1 Last message is now the current message.
-
-
- MESSAGE
-
- This command is used to set various flags on the Current Message. After
- the execution of this command, the message list, if it is currently being
- displayed, will be re-displayed with the changed status. The forms of
- this command are as follows:
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE SELECT
-
- This command marks the Current Message as selected.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no Current Message.
- 0 The Current Message is already marked as selected.
- 1 The Current Message is now marked as selected.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE UNSELECT
-
- This command marks the Current Message as un-selected.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no Current Message.
- 0 The Current Message is not marked as selected.
- 1 The Current Message is now marked as un-selected.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE DELETE
-
- This command marks the Current Message as deleted.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no Current Message.
- 0 The Current Message is already marked as deleted.
- 1 The Current Message is now marked as deleted.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE UNDELETE
-
- This command marks the Current Message as not deleted.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no Current Message.
- 0 The Current Message is not currently marked as deleted.
- 1 The Current Message is now no longer marked as deleted.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE READ
-
- This command marks the Current Message as being read.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no Current Message.
- 0 The Current Message is already marked as being read.
- 1 The Current Message is now marked as being read.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE MAKE NEW
-
- This command marks the Current Message as unread or new.
-
- NOTE: If the message was marked as deleted, only the "new" flag is set;
- otherwise, both the "new" and "unread" flags are set.
-
- RESULT: -1 There is no Current Message.
- 0 The Current Message is already marked as unread (new).
- 1 The Current Message is now marked as unread.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE SELECT ALL
-
- All messages in the current selected folder are marked as selected. This
- command does not change the Current Message status.
-
- RESULT: 0 There are no messages in the selected folder.
- 1 All of the messages in the selected folder are marked as
- selected.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: MESSAGE SELECT NONE
- MESSAGE UNSELECT ALL
-
- This command can be expressed in either form above.
-
- All messages in the current selected folder are marked as un-selected.
- This command does not change the Current Message status.
-
- RESULT: 0 There are no messages in the selected folder.
- 1 All of the messages in the selected folder are now marked as
- un-selected.
-
- NEXT
-
- This command is used to select the next message in the current folder or
- to select the next name string from the list of To: or cc: recipients.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: NEXT
- NEXT NEW
- NEXT SELECTED
- NEXT DELETED
-
- Without an operand this command selects the next message, regardless of
- it's status, in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- With the NEW operand, this command selects the next un-read (new) message
- in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
- message.
-
- With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the next selected (message
- marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder as the
- current message.
-
- With the DELETED operand, this command selects the next message marked as
- deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- NOTE: The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
- This generally means that the order of the messages in the folder is that
- older messages are before newer messages.
-
- RESULT: 0 No more messages of the particular type are in the folder.
- At the end of the message list.
- 1 The next message is now the current message.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: NEXT NAME
-
- This command returns the next name from the header field that was
- referenced by the last FIRST command. A FIRST TONAME, FIRST CCNAME, or
- FIRST BCCNAME command must have been issued prior to issuing the first
- NEXT NAME command. Each NEXT NAME command that is issued retrieves the
- next name in that header field. Once the end of the name list is reached,
- another FIRST command must be issued before another NEXT NAME command is
- issued. The name can be in one of the following formats:
-
- email-address (Full Name)
- Full Name <email-address>
- email-address
- addressbook-nickname
-
- Names in the header recipient lists are separated by commas; however, a
- comma may be embedded within a real name if the real name is surrounded by
- quotes.
-
- If you wish to extract either the Full Name, email-address, or the
- addressbook-nickname from the RESULT you can set the RESULT to a variable
- and then use the EXTRACT command with that variable as the arguement.
-
- RESULT: -2 The name string has not been started with the
- FIRST command.
- NULL or blank You are at the end of the list. There are no
- more names in the current header field.
- The next name in the appropriate header.
-
- OKAY1
-
- Syntax: OKAY1 text
-
- This commands presents the AEMail notification requester containing the
- supplied text. If there are any ARexx specific command operators within
- the text stream, the stream should be surrounded in quotes.
-
- The notification requester has one button marked "Continue". Clicking on
- this button will terminate the requester and the OKAY1 command.
-
- Warning: Be careful of the size of the text string that you pass to this
- command. If the string is too long without intervening line feeds, the
- "Continue" button could be positioned off the screen and you will have no
- way to terminate the requester. This can be particularly true of returned
- strings that are being displayed. It is best to use the ARexx LEFT()
- function to insure you have a short enough string.
-
- RESULT: 1 Always returned
-
-
- OKAY2
-
- Syntax: OKAY1 responses text
-
- This commands presents the AEMail notification requester containing the
- supplied text. If there are any ARexx specific command operators within
- the text stream, the stream should be surrounded in quotes.
-
- "responses" provides a list of possible responses to the requester. Any
- number of responses can be provided. Each response must be separated by
- the vertical bar ("|"). The entire response string must be surrounded by
- quote marks.
-
- The notification requester has as many buttons as they are responses. The
- wording in these buttons is controlled by the response string. Clicking
- on any of these buttons will terminate the requester and the OKAY2
- command.
-
- RESULT: 0 The last response in the response string was selected.
- 1 The first response was selected.
- n The second through nth (last - 1) response was selected.
-
-
- PREVIOUS
- Syntax: PREVIOUS
- PREVIOUS NEW
- PREVIOUS SELECTED
- PREVIOUS DELETED
-
- Without an operand this command selects the previous message, regardless
- of it's status, in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- With the NEW operand, this command selects the previous un-read (new)
- message in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- If a message is unread but deleted, it will NOT be considered an un-read
- message.
-
- With the SELECTED operand, this command selects the previous selected
- (message marked with an asterick) message in the current selected folder
- as the current message.
-
- With the DELETED operand, this command selects the previous message marked
- as deleted in the current selected folder as the current message.
-
- NOTE: The order of the messages in the folder is the un-sorted order.
- This generally means that the order of the messages in the folder is that
- older messages are before newer messages.
-
- RESULT: 0 No more messages of the particular type are in the folder.
- At the beginning of the message list.
- 1 The next previous is now the current message.
-
-
-
- QUEUE
-
- Syntax: QUEUE "message-file-name" [MAILTO userid]
-
- The message file indicated by "message-file-name" will be read into the
- system and will be placed in the QUEUED folder. This message must have
- correctly formatted headers. A blank line must separate the headers from
- the body of the message.
-
- The "message-file-name" should be the full path name of the message file
- and it should be quoted since the path will contain characters that ARexx
- will attempt to interpret as operators. It may also contain embedded
- spaces. If it does contain embedded spaces, double quote pairs must be
- used, ie. '"filename string"' or '"'variable'"'.
-
- Any address provided with the To: header can be either an Address Book
- nickname or a full email address. Multiple To: addresses can be provided
- as well as multiple cc: or bcc: addresses.
-
- Instead of a To: address provided in the message the optional MAILTO
- keyword can be used to provide a userid which can be an Address Book
- nickname or an email address. The MAILTO address will be added to any
- addresses provide with a To: header.
-
- If the From: or Reply-To: addresses are not given, these addresses will be
- taken from the default From: and Reply-To addresses.
-
- Any Date: header is ignored since the Date: header will be constructed
- when the message is sent.
-
- Any other non-standard headers can be supplied in the message file and
- they will be included with the message.
-
- Only the To: header has to be provided unless the MAILTO parameter is
- given. If the MAILTO parameter is used, no headers have to be provided
- with the message. However, if this is done, a blank line MUST be the
- first line in the message file.
-
- Additional RC type errors can be received by this command if the
- message-file-name is invalid or an error occurred reading in the message
- file. Each of these errors have a severity level of 5 with one of the
- following messages placed in the AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable:
-
- 105: Error Opening Passed Message
- 106: Error retrieving passed message
-
- No validation is made on the To: address in the message. If it is
- invalid, either the user will receive an error when the message is sent or
- a message will be received indicating "Returned mail: User unknown".
-
- RESULT: 1: Message was placed in the QUEUED folder.
-
-
-
- REPLYTO
-
- Syntax: REPLYTO
-
- This command returns the Reply-To: header of the current message without
- the "Reply-To: ". It has no operands.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No Reply-To: header
- Reply-To: header
- SAVE
-
- This command can save the current message or selected messages or the text
- portion of a message to a file. The current message or current message
- text can also be directly returned in the RESULT variable. The Current
- Message text can also be saved to the clipboard.
-
- The various forms of this command are given below:
-
- Syntax: SAVE MESSAGE
-
- This command will return the Current Message in the RESULT variable. This
- will be the complete message including all headers, message body, and all
- attachments.
-
- WARNING: This will return only the first 4092 characters of the current
- message. Line Feed characters will be included at the end of each line in
- the message.
-
- You can use the GETSIZE MESSAGE command to obtain the size of the message
- to see if it will fit.
-
- RESULT: NULL or blank There is no Current Message
- The message (up to 4092 characters)
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: SAVE MESSAGE [TO] filename
-
- This command will save the Current Message to the file whose complete path
- and file name is filename. This should be a quoted variable. You can
- solicit a filename by using the GETFILENAME command before issuing this
- command.
-
- The keyword TO is optional.
-
- The message saved is the complete message including all headers, message
- body, and all attachments. Except for available disk space, there is no
- limit on the size of the message. Line Feed characters will be included
- at the end of each line in the message.
-
- RESULT: 0 There is no current message
- 1 The current message has been saved.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: SAVE SELECTED MESSAGES [TO] filename
-
- This command will save all of the selected messages in the current
- selected folder to the file whose complete path and file name is filename.
- This should be a quoted variable. You can solicit a filename by using the
- GETFILENAME command before issuing this command.
-
- All of the messages will be saved in the single file specified as a block
- of messages.
-
- The keyword TO is optional.
-
- The messages saved include the complete message including all headers,
- message body, and all attachments. Except for available disk space, there
- is no limit on the size of the message. Line Feed characters will be
- included at the end of each line in the message.
-
- RESULT: 0 There is no messages selected
- 1 The current message has been saved.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: SAVE TEXT
- SAVE TEXT NOLF
-
- This command will return the text body of the Current Message in the
- RESULT variable. This will be only the body text without headers or
- attachments.
-
- Normally the text is returned with a line feed separating each line. If
- you use the "NOLF" operand, this line feed will be left off. This means
- that the body lines will be one continuous string of data. This can be
- very helpful if you have a short message generated by a forms command sent
- by email in a web page.
-
- WARNING: This will return only the first 4092 characters of the current
- message body text. Line Feed characters will be included at the end of
- each line in the message unless NOLF is specified.
-
- You can use the GETSIZE TEXT command to obtain the size of the message
- body to see if it will fit.
-
- RESULT: NULL or blank There is no Current Message
- The message text (up to 4092 characters)
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: SAVE TEXT [TO] filename
-
- This command will save the text body of the Current Message to the file
- whose complete path and file name is filename. This should be a quoted
- variable. You can solicit a filename by using the GETFILENAME command
- before issuing this command.
-
- The keyword TO is optional.
-
- The text saved is only the body text without headers or attachments.
- Except for available disk space, there is no limit on the size of the
- message text. Line Feed characters will be included at the end of each
- line in the message.
-
- RESULT: 0 There is no current message
- 1 The current message text has been saved.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: SAVE TEXT [TO] CLIPBOARD
- SAVE TEXT [TO] CLIPBOARD n
-
- The first form of this command will save the text body of the Current
- Message to the clipboard unit that is currently active. The second form
- will allow you to save the text to the clipboard unit specified by n.
-
- You can determine which clipboard is currently active by using the GETCLIP
- UNIT command.
-
- If you use the "n" parameter, the currently active clipboard unit will be
- changed to n after the command is successfully executed (RESULT of 1).
- The keyword TO is optional.
-
- The text saved is only the body text without headers or attachments.
- Except for available RAM space, there is no limit on the size of the
- message text. Line Feed characters will be included at the end of each
- line in the message.
-
- RESULT: 0 There is no current message
- 1 The current message text has been saved to the clipboard.
-
- ***
-
- Syntax: SAVE "string of text" [TO] CLIPBOARD
- SAVE "string of text" [TO] CLIPBOARD n
-
- The first form of this command will save the string of text passed as a
- quoted string to the clipboard unit that is currently active. The second
- form will allow you to save the string to the clipboard unit specified by
- n.
-
- You can determine which clipboard is currently active by using the GETCLIP
- UNIT command.
-
- If you use the "n" parameter, the currently active clipboard unit will be
- changed to n after the command is successfully executed (RESULT of 1).
- The keyword TO is optional.
-
- The keyword TO is optional.
-
- The string saved must be quoted to allow for embedded spaces and special
- characters. As an example:
-
- SAVE '"This is a string of characters"' TO CLIPBOARD 3
-
- will save the string "This is a string of characters" to clipboard number
- 3.
-
- The string is limited to 119 characters. If a larger string is given it
- will be truncated at 119 characters.
-
- RESULT: 1 The string has been saved to the clipboard.
-
- SCREENTOBACK
-
- Syntax: SCREENTOBACK AEMAIL
- SCREENTOBACK WORKBENCH
- SCREENTOBACK public-screen-name
-
- This command brings either the AEMail screen, the Workbench screen or
- the named public-screen-name to the back of the display.
-
- RESULT: 0 The public-screen-name is invalid or no longer open
- 1 The specified screen has been moved to the back.
-
-
- SCREENTOFRONT
-
- Syntax: SCREENTOFRONT AEMAIL
- SCREENTOFRONT WORKBENCH
- SCREENTOFRONT public-screen-name
-
- This command brings either the AEMail screen, the Workbench screen or
- the named public-screen-name to the front of the display.
-
- RESULT: 0 The public-screen-name is invalid or no longer open
- 1 The specified screen is now the front most screen.
-
-
- SUBJECT
-
- Syntax: SUBJECT
-
- This command returns the Subject: header of the current message without
- "Subject: ". It has no operands.
-
- Also, the RE: and (fwd), if present, is stripped from the header string.
- You can use the FLAGS command to determine if the current message is a
- reply or forwarded message.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No Subject: header
- Subject: header
-
-
- TO
-
- Syntax: TO
-
- This command returns the To: header of the current message without the
- "To: ". It has no operands.
-
- RESULT: -1 No current message
- NULL or blanks No To: header
- To: header
-
- Error Messages
- --------------
-
- When a command returns an RC value other than 0 the RC code represents a
- severity code. Severity codes are usually 5 or 20. A string error
- message will also appear in the AEMAIL.LASTERROR variable. These errors
- can be interrogated and displayed.
-
- The errors that you can expect from AEMail are as follows:
-
- "100: Unknown command"
- "101: Syntax Error"
- "102: No Operand Required"
- "103: Missing Operand"
- "104: Too Many Operands"
- "105: Error Opening Passed Message"
- "106: Error retrieving passed message"
- "110: Out of Memory"
-
- Additional errors which will not have a error message number associated
- with them are:
-
- "Unable to open input mail file"
- "Error reading input mail file"
- "Unable to open output file"
- "Error writing to output file"
-
- X. AEMAIL FILES
-
- The following are the various files used by AEMail. Normally, they all
- reside in the AEMAIL: directory with the exception of the aemail.cnfg
- file, the TCPLOG file and the mailcap file. The aemail.cnfg file normally
- resides in the S: directory, and both the TCPLOG file and the mailcap
- file may or may not reside in the AEMAIL: directory depending on the
- user's preference.
-
- You can override the AEMAIL: assign by using the MAIL_DIR= Tool Type and
- you can change the name an location of the aemail.cnfg file with the
- CONFIG= Tool Type.
-
- SPECIAL NOTE: If the AEMAIL: assign is missing or is incorrect and you do
- not have a MAIL_DIR= Tool Type, you will not be able to run AEMail.
-
- With the exception of the mailcap file, you can begin AEMail without any
- of the other files being present. They will be automatically created as
- you process messages or do other AEMail actions.
-
- The mailcap file, if used, MUST be setup prior to executing AEMail. This
- can be done using any text editor.
-
- The following are the AEMail files:
-
- mailcap
- -------
-
- The mailcap file is used to establish programs that should be executed to
- display MIME attachments. Use of this file allows AEMail to use any
- AmigaDOS operating system 2.1 or above.
-
- The mailcap file is a standard Internet file which is specified in RFC
- (Request For Comment) 1524. Since it is standard, you can use a mailcap
- file that was created for another program that specified a display program
- for the same type of files. That is the reason that AEMail allows you to
- specify the directory that contains the mailcap file with the Tool Type
- MAILCAP_DIR= or with the Configuration Screen. If you do not include this
- Tool Type or change the specification in the Default Path section of the
- Configuration Screen, the mailcap directory will default to the AEMAIL:
- directory.
-
- AEMail only uses the two required fields of the RFC 1524 standard. Other
- fields are ignored at this time.
-
- Each mailcap file consists of entries that describe the proper handling of
- one media type at the local site. A mailcap file consists of a sequence
- of such individual entries separated by LINE FEEDS. Blank lines and lines
- starting with '#' are considered comments and are ignored. Long entries
- may be continued on multiple lines if the line to be continued ends with a
- backslash character ('\'). In this event, mutiple lines are to treated as
- a single mailcap entry. Note that for such "continued" lines, the
- backslash must be the last character of the line to be continued.
-
- Each mailcap entry consists of a number of fields each separated by a
- semicolon (';'). The first two fields are required, and must occur in the
- specified order. The remaining fields are optional and may appear in any
- order. NOTE: At this time AEMail does not use these optional fields and
- if they are present, ignores them. Because of this, these optional fields
- WILL NOT be discussed in this documentation.
-
- The general format of a mailcap entry is:
-
- content type; view command [; ......] LINE FEED
-
- The first field is the content type, which indicates the type of data this
- mailcap entry describes how to handle. It is to be matched against the
- type/subtype specification in the "Content-Type" MIME header (see the ADD
- ATTACHMENTS REQUESTER described in section VIII. AEMAIL WINDOWS above).
-
- If the subtype is "*", it is intended to match all subtypes of the named
- content type.
-
- Examples of the content type field are:
-
- images/gif
-
- which is intended to match only the images/gif type/subtype whereas
-
- images/*
-
- matches all image types (images/gif, images/jpeg, etc).
-
- The second field, view command, is a specification of how the attachment
- meeting the content type specification is viewed. For any particular
- operating system, this would indicate how the program is called. For
- AEMail this would include the entire path name for calling the program and
- any parameters that are needed on the command line. A "%s" is used to
- indicate the substitution of the attachment name. The entire entry should
- be surrounded by quotes. As an example:
-
- "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
-
- would call multiview placing the displayed attachment on its own screen
- (the "screen" parameter).
-
- If you needed to have the display on the Workbench screen you can add the
- keyword "wb;" in front of the program path. As an example, if you wanted
- multiview to open on a window on the Workbench screen, you could use:
-
- "wb;sys:Utilities/multiview %s"
-
- Note the use of the quotes (") surrounding the parameter. This is
- necessary so that the mailcap interpreter will be prevented from treating
- special characters (such as ';') as part of the mailcap syntax.
-
- Also note the absence of the "screen" keyword. The above call would push
- the Workbench screen to the front when MultiView was called and the
- Workbench screen would be used for the MultiView window. The only problem
- with this is you would be limited to the number of colors and the
- resolution specified for Workbench. Some other programs, however, might
- only be able to open as a window on the Workbench screen and would be
- hidden by the AEMail screen when those programs were called unless the
- "wb;" parameter was specified.
-
- An example of a complete mailcap entry to use multiview to display all
- images would be:
-
- image/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
-
- Any image/ type, regardless of the subtype, would be displayed providing
- there was an appropriate data type present for that image subtype.
-
- A sample mailcap file is included with the archive which uses MultiView
- for text, message, sound, image, and video files. Since MultiView is a
- 3.x program using datatypes, this mailcap file will ONLY work with 3.x
- systems. To make it work for 2.x systems, you would need to change the
- display programs to your favorite programs that work with 2.x. You might
- also have to be specific as to the subtype for a specific display
- type/subtype. If you install AEMail on a 2.1 system using the provided
- installation script, you will be able to create the mailcap file provided
- you selected "Expert" mode for the installation "user mode".
-
- The following is the sample mailcap file used for AmigaDos 3.x that uses
- MultiView as the display agent. Please note the use of the "screen"
- parameter which tells MultiView to open on it's own screen rather than the
- WorkBench screen. This allows the use of all colors in the image's
- palette.
-
- text/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s"
- message/*; "sys:Utilities/Multiview %s"
- image/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
- audio/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
- video/*; "sys:Utilities/multiview %s screen"
-
-
- General Configuration File (aemail.cnfg)
- ----------------------------------------
-
- The s:aemail.cnfg file is the General Configuration file. This file
- contains various configuration information including the version and
- revision number of the AEMail version that was last loaded. A special
- flag in this file indicates whether this file should take precedence over
- the Tool Type entries.
-
- This file is normally placed in the S: directory rather than the AEMAIL:
- directory. The reason for this was that if you changed the location of
- the AEMAIL: directory, AEMail would not be able to locate the new
- configuration file the next time you loaded AEMail. Also, the S:
- directory is more commonly used to store configuration files for AMIGA
- programs.
-
- You do not have to store this file in the S: directory nor do you have to
- name it "aemail.cnfg". This is only the default name and location for
- this file. With the use of the CONFIG= Tool Type or the config= parameter
- on the shell call for AEMail, you can rename the file and place it
- anywhere you want.
-
- Starting with AEMail version 1.13 you can also have multiple configuration
- files. This allows you to set up multiple configurations for different
- users of AEMail. You can select which configuration you want through the
- "Project/Configuration/Open" menu item.
-
- If the configuration is never changed with the Configuration Screen, the
- Tool Type entries will take precedence. If either the [SAVE] or [SAVE TO]
- gadgets in the Configuration Screen is selected, or the
- "Project/Configuration/Save" or "Project/Configuration/Save to" menu items
- are selected, the General Configuration File will always take precedence.
-
- The s:aemail.cnfg (or CONFIG= Tool Type or config= shell parameter) is
- referred as your base configuration file. You can always return to the
- base configuration through the "Project/Configuration/Restore Default"
- menu item.
-
- If you display the AEMail General Configuration file with a text editor,
- you will find that not all portions of the file are readable as text. The
- only way you can create and update the general configuration file is
- through AEMail itself.
-
- As part of this file is your password stored in encrypted format.
-
-
- .headers
- --------
-
- The .headers file provides a list of message headers. Those that you want
- displayed in the message as "minimum headers" are preceded by an asterick
- (*); all other headers are preceded by a space.
-
- The .headers file may not be present. If it is not, the following are
- displayed as the "minimum headers":
-
- Date:
- From:
- Reply-To:
- To:
- cc:
- bcc:
- Subject:
-
- See the discussion on configuring minimum headers in the General
- Parameters page of the Configuration Screen.
-
-
- folder.config
- -------------
-
- This file gives the general information about each of the folders
- including:
-
- Flags (long word, 4 bytes): general flags concerning this folder
- Name (9 bytes including ending NULL): short folder name
- Pen (1 byte): pen number for folder tab
- Sort Keys (8 bytes): the permanent sort keys for the folder
- Folder Description (string ending in LINE FEED): the folder
- description. If this is a folder for one of the pre-set
- folders, this string will be empty (LINE FEED only) unless
- the user has decided to change the folder description.
- Each Filter string ending in a LINE FEED. Each string begins with 4
- bytes that provide filter parameters as follows:
- 1 byte indicating the header to be searched
- 2 bytes of flags
- 1 byte indicating the compare criteria
- Three successive LINE FEEDS ends each folder config entry.
-
- For those fields that are strings: if the field is empty there will be a
- LINE FEED with no data preceding it. If filters have been specified, each
- filter will have at least 4 bytes followed by the search arguement (if
- present) and a LINE FEED.
-
- folder.config files for versions prior to 1.40 can be read by AEMail
- version 1.40 or later. However, once a filter has been added, earlier
- versions can not properly read the version 1.40 or later folder.config.
- If no filters are added, earlier versions of AEMail can still read the
- folder.config file.
-
- It is suggested that you copy your current folder.config file to
- folder.config.old before implementing AEMail 1.40. The Install script
- will do this for you with a prompt.
-
- NOTE: if for some reason your folder.config file becomes corrupted or is
- accidently deleted, you can restore all of the folders and the messages
- within them by doing the following:
-
- delete any current folder.config file (or rename it so it is
- no longer recognized).
- Run AEMail. Add any additional folders that you previously
- had added. (INBOX, PENDING, QUEUED and SENT will automatically
- be created). You must use the exact name you had previously
- used.
- The new folders will show 0 messages.
- Quit AEMail.
- Re-Run AEMail. The new folders should now show the appropriate
- number of messages provided a valid [folder_Name].config
- file was present for that folder. The name of the new
- folder must exactly match the [folder_Name] in the
- [folder_Name].config file.
-
-
- [folder_Name].config
- --------------------
-
- For each of the folders that contain messages there will be a
- configuration file which gives information on the messages in that folder.
- The name of the file will be the short folder name with ".config" appended
- to it.
-
- For this version of AEMail, the [folder_Name].config file contains the
- following information for each message in the folder:
-
- Message Flags (word, 2 bytes): Flags describing the message.
- File Code (long word, 4 bytes): this field is a binary field
- which is used to derive the file name for the message file
- itself.
- Message Size (long word, 4 bytes): size of message.
- Body Displacement (word, 2 bytes): the position where the
- body of the message starts.
- From (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- From: field in the message header.
- Subject (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- Subject: field in the message header. The RE: and FWD:
- headings at the beginning of the Subject header are
- stripped, but indicated by flags in the Message Flags field
- so that the exact subject field can be reconstructed.
- Date (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- Date: field in the message header.
- To (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- To: field in the message header.
- Reply-To (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- Reply-To: field in the message header.
- cc (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- cc: field in the message header.
- bcc (string ending in LINE FEED): the information in the
- bcc: field in the message header.
-
- For those fields that are strings: if the field is empty, there will be a
- LINE FEED without any data preceding it.
-
- NOTE: For AEMail versions prior to 1.42, only the first header line of
- any particular header type (ie, To:, cc:, etc.) was saved in the header
- strings of the [Folder_Name].config file. For version 1.42 and later, the
- complete header string is saved with all lines of the particular header
- type. Up to 4096 characters can be saved (if there are that many lines
- for a particular header type).
-
- This is particularly important for messages that have multiple To: or cc:
- recipients. This means that the complete list of recipients can be
- examined in Filter commands and also provides the capability to send
- replys to all the recipients of a message.
-
- This does create a problem, however, if the [Folder_Name].config created
- by Version 1.42 or later is read by a version of AEMail prior to 1.42.
- The Version 1.42 or later [Folder_Name].config file that contains any
- message that has long multiple recipient lists (more than one line) can
- not be read correctly by versions prior to 1.42. If you need to revert to
- an earlier version of AEMail, you can do the following:
-
- With Version 1.42 or later, export (save) all messages with multiple
- recipients that were read by 1.42 or later to a file. You do not have to
- worry about messages read by earlier versions.
-
- Delete all of the messages you just saved.
-
- Then, from the earlier version of AEMail, retrieve from file the messages
- you just saved. The header lines will be truncated by the earlier
- version.
-
- The reverse is also possible. Messages with multiple recipients read by
- earlier versions will have their header data truncated. You can export
- (save) the message to a file and then re-read it into AEMail with all
- header data intact.
-
-
- .addrbook
- ---------
-
- This file provides address book information. Each record looks like this:
-
- Version (word, 2 bytes): The address book version. Prior to
- Version 1 of the address book, this and the following field
- did not exist. The flag $8000 identifies this as a
- legitimate version field to distinguish the addess book
- file from version 0. NOTE: The Address Book version is
- NOT the same as the AEMail Version. The Address Book
- version only changes when the format of the Address Book
- changes.
- Flags (word, 2 bytes): Flags describing group actions. In
- Version 0, the flags field was given in the high order byte
- of the count field which limited the group count to 255.
- Count (word, 2 bytes): If this field is zero, the entry is
- a single user entry. If this field is greater that zero
- it represents a group entry and indicates the number of
- UserIds in the group.
- Nickname (string ending in LINE FEED): the Nickname for this
- entry (both group or user).
- Real Name (string ending in LINE FEED): the Real Name for
- individual users or the group description for group
- entries.
- UserID (one or more strings ending in LINE FEEDS): The number
- of UserID fields is determined by the count at the
- beginning of the record. For individual users, this MUST
- be the UserID and Domain for that user. For group users
- this can be a Nickname that points to the real user.
-
- For a description of how entries in the Address Book can be created and
- displayed see the Section VIII, AEMAIL Windows: Address Book window.
-
-
- .signature
- ----------
-
- This is a flat ASCII file that contains the signature block that is to be
- appended to any composed messages. Each line of the signature block must
- end in a LINE FEED.
-
- A facility is provided when composing messages to create and or edit this
- signature block (see the Compose Message window description in Section
- VIII above).
-
- Starting with AEMail Version 1.20, multiple signature files can be used.
- These signature files can be named whatever the user wishes and can be
- placed wherever the user wishes (Registered Users ONLY).
-
- Messages
- --------
-
- Each message is stored as an individual file with a cryptic file name
- generated from the File Code in the [Folder_Name].config file. This name
- begins with "AE" and ends with "M" with a number of numeric digits in
- between. The message is stored as a flat ASCII file as it is received
- from the POP Server with any CARRAGE RETURNS in a CARRAGE RETURN/LINE FEED
- sequences stripped. This follows the Amiga format for ASCII files.
-
- The complete message is stored along with any attachments as they were
- orginally received. Any particular message can be copied to a named file
- anywhere in your system through the "SAVE MESSAGE TO FILE" command. If
- you have an off line program that can process a mime message or a message
- with UUENCODED attachments, you can use that program against this file to
- extract the attachments or you can save that attachment directly with the
- Attachment Requester in the Message Display Window (Section VIII).
-
- If messages are left in the PENDING or QUEUED folders, two additional
- files may be created when AEMail terminates. If attachments were added to
- the message when it was created, a file with the same name as the message
- file but with "AT" appended to it will be created. This file contains
- information about the attachments. A second file may be created if
- additional headers were created. This file has "HD" appended to the
- original message name.
-
- Both of these files are deleted when AEMail is loaded and the PENDING and
- QUEUED message lists are created internally. The files are re-created if
- the messages remain in the PENDING or QUEUED folders when AEMail
- terminates.
-
- PLEASE NOTE: if the [folder_Name].config file is deleted you will lose
- all capability of retrieving your messages unless you have previously
- copied them to named files.
-
-
- TCP Trace Log File (TCPLOG)
- ---------------------------
-
- This file is present if you have specified
-
- TCPLOG=name-of-log-file
-
- in the Tool Types parameters or named a "TCP Logging File" in the Default
- Path Parameters page of the Configuration screen. Since
- "name-of-log-file" must be the full path name of the log file, this file
- may or may not reside in the AEMAIL: directory
-
- The TCP Trace Log File traces every TCP transaction. Each time AEMail is
- started the following record is written to the file:
-
- Logging Beginning at DD MMM YR HH:MM:SS
-
- where DD is the day of the week, MMM is the month (Jan, Feb, Mar, etc), YY
- is the 2 digit year (97) and HH, MM, and SS are the hour (24 hour clock),
- minutes, and seconds.
-
- Each logging record will consist of a 38 byte header and up to 82 bytes of
- either descriptive information or actual data received or sent over the
- TCP interface. The header consists of a 21 byte date/time stamp (DD MMM
- YR HH:MM:SS) and 16 byte routine name of the routine in AEMail that called
- the trace.
-
- If data is displayed, instances of a CARRAGE RETURN will be displayed as
- <CR> and of LINE FEEDS as <LF>. If the data exceeds 82 bytes, <---> will
- be placed at the end of the line.
-
- When AEMail terminates, or the TCPLOG file name is changed by the Default
- Path Parameters page of the Configuration screen, the following record is
- written to the file:
-
- Logging Ending at DD MMM YY HH:MM:SS
-
- Each AEMail session is stacked behind the previous one, so that the file
- can become quite large. Periodic purging of the file can occur by
- deleting the TCPLOG file in between sessions of AEMail. Also, a new file
- is created when you change the name of the TCPLOG file with the
- Configuration screen.
-
-
- XI. BUG REPORTS AND SUGGESTIONS
-
- Bugs should be reported to:
-
- jzachar@calweb.com
-
- by email. You can also use the nickname AEMAIL which has been
- automatically stored in your address book.
-
- In reporting bugs, be as complete as possible in describing the
- circumstances leading up to the bug. It would be helpful if you indicate
- all actions (mouse clicks, etc) that you took before the problem occurred.
- If you are having problems connecting to your Internet provider, or
- sending or receiving mail, you should activate the TCP Log file (See
- Section X, AEMAIL FILES: TCP Trace Log File) and send a copy of the log
- as an attachment to your message. You might want to block out any
- password that is contained in the file before you send it to me, however.
- You can do that with any text editor.
-
- I would also appreciate any suggestions that you have for improving
- AEMail. I will not guarantee that I will accept all suggestions or that I
- will necessarily implement them in the next release; however, I do take
- each suggestion seriously. In the past I have implemented a number of
- suggestions made by my testers. I will attempt to respond to each
- suggestion that is made.
-
- In making suggestions keep in mind some of the restraints that I have
- placed on AEMAIL:
-
- (1) The program should be able to be run on any version of
- AmigaDos 2.1 or greater, and
-
- (2) with the exception of TCP/IP stack software (ie., AmiTCP, Miami,
- or TermiteTCP) AEMail should not require any extension to your
- system that does not come with a standard AmigaDOS release. This
- effectively rules out MUI. Using an editor of your choice meets
- this criteria since you can use the standard AmigaDOS editors, ED
- or MEMACS, which come with the standard AMIGA systems.
-
- When reporting bugs or making suggestions, please be as complete as
- possible in describing the circumstances that brought about the problem or
- how the suggestion could be implemented.
-
-
- XII. REFERENCES
-
- A number of software packages are mentioned in this documentation.
- Details on how to obtain these packages are given below:
-
- TCP/IP STACKS
-
- AmiTCP A TCP/IP stack for use with the Amiga. AmiTCP
- is copyright (c) 1994, 1995 by Network Solutions
- Development, Inc.
-
- AmiTCP was developed by Network Solutions Development,
- Inc., P.O. Box 32, FIN-02151 Espoo, Finland.
-
- A demo 4.0 version is available on AmiNet sites in
- countries other than USA or Australia. It can also
- be found on many BBS's.
-
- The commercial version is distributed by Village
- Tronic Marketing GmbH, Wellweg 95, D-31157 Sarstedt,
- Germany, and is available from many Amiga dealers and
- mail order houses.
-
- World Wide Web home page for Network Solutions
- Development, Inc is:
-
- http://www.xgu.fi/biz/NSDI/
-
- email addresses: info@nsdi.fi
- AmiTCP-Support@nsdi.fi
- AmiTCP-Group@nsdi.fi
-
- Miami A TCP/IP stack compatible with AmiTCP. This stack
- is very simple to install and configure. Miami is
- copyright (c) 1996, 1997 by Holger Kruse. It is
- currently shareware and is available at
-
- http://www.nordicglobal.com/miami.html
-
- on the WWW or it may be available on local BBS's.
- Some versions are available on AmiNet, but if you want
- the latest version consult the web page listed above.
-
- email addresses: kruse@nordicglobal.com
- kruse@america.com
-
- If you are using Miami, the "Down when Offline" item
- in the TCP/IP Settings page for Miami should be
- checked and your settings saved. This will prevent
- Miami from waiting 80 seconds before returning a
- failure when you try to access the Internet when you
- are "Offline".
-
- TermiteTCP A TCP/IP stack compatible with AmiTCP. This stack is
- very simple to install and configure. TermiteTCP is
- copyright (c) 1996 by Oregon Research, 16200 S.W.
- Pacific Hwy, Suite 162, Tigard, OR 97224.
-
- This is a commercial product available at many Amiga
- dealers, mail order houses, or directly from Oregon
- Research.
-
- World Wide Web home page for Oregon Research is:
-
- http://www.orres.com/~orres/
-
- email address: support@orres.com
-
-
- WWW BROWSERS
-
- IBrowse Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 by Omnipresence Intl.
-
- IBrowse is a commercial product distributed by Oregon
- Research in the United States and HiSoft in the
- United Kingdom and can be obtained from Amiga dealers
- or mail order houses. A demo version and upgrades can
- be obtained from the Omnipresence WWW site at:
-
- http://www.omnipresence.com/ibrowse
-
- and on AmiNet.
-
- Voyager NG Copyright (c) 1995-97 by Oiver Wagner. Voyager is
- available for download from AmiNet or the
-
- http://www.vapor.com/support
-
- WWW site.
-
- email address: owagner@lsd.wupper.de
-
- AWeb-II Copyright (c) 1996 by AmiTrix Development.
-
- Both a public domain demo (AWEB) and a commercial
- (AWEB II) version is available. The public domain
- demo version can be found on AmiNet (AWeb v1.2b),
- many BBS's, or on the AmiTrix WWW site:
-
- http://www.networkx.com/amitrix/aweb.html
-
- The commercial version (AWEB II) can be obtained from
- Amiga dealers or mail order houses.
-
- email addresses: sales@amitrix.com
- support@amitrix.com
-
- Mailing address: AmiTrix Development
- 5312-47 Street
- Beaumont Alberta, Canada T4X 1H9
-
-
- XIII. IN CONCLUSION
-
- As payment for receiving and using this unregestered BETA version of
- AEMail, I would like any bugs, comments, or suggestions reported to me.
- You can send me email at
-
- jzachar@calweb.com
-
- or use the AEMAIL Nickname created in your Address Book.
-
- You can also register AEMail for a shareware fee of $30. See the
- discussion on REGISTRATION under Section II. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS.
-
- See the Section X, Bug Reports and Suggestions above for the reporting
- procedure.
-
- If you give a unregistered version of this program to anyone else to use
- and evaluate, please include the complete archive as distributed. This
- includes the AEMail program, the installation script, and all
- documentation and readme files.
-
- The complete archive is being posted on AmiNet and may be posted to any
- BBS. If it is posted to any particular BBS, I would appreciate it if the
- SYSOP of that BBS would send me an email message indicating the BBS it was
- posted to.
-
- Future versions of AEMail are planned that will implement the following
- features:
-
- Asynchronous retrieval of messages from a POP server
- Asynchronous sending of messages to the SMTP server
- Even faster message display routines
- Locale support
- Built in message editor
- Other features suggested by users
-
- I have a web site at:
-
- http://www.calweb.com/~jzachar/
-
- The latest version of AEMail will be posted to this web site. Major
- releases will also be posted on AmiNet.
-
- Whenever a new version of AEMail is available, I will email all users for
- which I have received notification messages (see Registration in Section
- II) with notice of the new version. If you do not wish to receive this
- notification, please email me at jzachar@calweb.com.
-
- Thanks,
-
- John Zacharias
- jzachar@calweb.com
-
- www: http://www.calweb.com/~jzachar/
-
-
-